JP2011036322A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of enhancing the amusement of the play by retaining a player's sense of expectancy for derivation of a display result advantageous to the player even if a prescribed operation procedure is not announced or if the slot machine is not operated according to the prescribed operation procedure. <P>SOLUTION: In the slot machine, reels are controlled in such a way that a grape minor jackpot is established if a first stop is operated according to a first advantageous operation procedure corresponding to grape and banana winning combinations when both grape minor jackpot and banana minor jackpot are simultaneously won; and that even if the first stop is not operated according to the first advantageous operation procedure, the banana and grape minor jackpots are established when second and third stops are operated according to a second advantageous operation procedure. A complete navigation presentation (Fig.11(a1)) announcing the first advantageous operation procedure is executed as a navigation presentation for announcing the operation procedure, or an on-the-way navigation presentation (Fig.11(b4)) announcing the second advantageous operation procedure is executed on the way of a game, in which the first stop is operated according to a procedure other than the first advantageous operation procedure without executing the complete navigation presentation. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, by setting the number of bets for one game, the game can be started and the display result is derived to a variable display device having a plurality of variable display areas capable of changing the display state. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the special role winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the winning of the re-gamer, it is possible to obtain a profit that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the number of bets.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition that a winning is made by an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

  In such a slot machine, in a game that has won a predetermined role such as replay in the internal lottery performed at the time of operating the start lever, the predetermined role is configured only when the stop button is operated according to a predetermined operation procedure determined by the lottery. There is one that performs reel control for drawing a symbol to be drawn and winning, and there is another that notifies a predetermined operation procedure when a notification condition is established at the start of the game (Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-236041 A

  However, in the slot machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, in a game won in a predetermined role, it is only expected to be operated by a predetermined operation procedure unless the predetermined operation procedure is notified at the start of the game. In other words, although it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the notification of the predetermined operation procedure, there is no choice but to pray that the predetermined operation procedure is accidentally operated in the game when the predetermined operation procedure is not notified.

  In addition, for example, after the first stop is not operated in the predetermined operation procedure, the symbols constituting the predetermined combination are not drawn on the effective line, and after it is determined that the predetermined combination is missed during the game, the predetermined combination is determined. It was not possible to have a sense of expectation that a display result advantageous to the player such as winning a prize would be derived.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is advantageous to the player even when the predetermined operation procedure is not notified and when the predetermined operation procedure is not performed. It is to provide a slot machine that can improve the interest of a game by maintaining a sense of expectation that a display result is derived.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) By setting the number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived to a variable display device having a plurality of variable display areas capable of changing the display state. A slot machine (slot machine in the first to third embodiments) in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R for accepting the first to third stops) for accepting an operation for stopping the display state in the variable display area for each of the plurality of variable display areas;
A means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the pre-decision means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, the display state in all of the plurality of variable display areas When the derivation operation accepting unit accepts an operation, the derivation is performed so that the display state in the variable display area corresponding to the operation is stopped and the display state in the variable display area is updated. Control means (reel rotation processing);
A notification means (navigation effect execution process) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect);
When the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (the left pressed grape 1, the left pressed grape 2, the middle pressed grape 1, the middle pressed grape 2, the right pressed grape 1 In order to stop the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the type of the specific result among the plurality of variable display areas in the first stage determined in advance. The operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the specific procedure (first advantageous operation procedure, procedure for first stopping the first stop reel for winning one of the grapes 1 to 8, see FIG. 9). Regardless of the procedure (second stop, third stop) that is accepted in the subsequent stages, the advantageous display results (grapes 1-8 and banana grapes 1-12) that are advantageous to the player Even if the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage (see FIG. 9). The derivation operation accepting means in a special procedure (second advantageous operation procedure) corresponding to the type of the specific result in a predetermined second step (second stop, third stop) after the first step. When the operation is accepted by the above, control is performed to derive the advantageous display result (any one of the banana grapes 1 to 12 among the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grapes 1 to 12) (see FIG. 9).
The notification means includes
The specific procedure information (complete navigation effect) capable of specifying the specific procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result is notified on the condition that the determination result of the prior determination means is one of the plurality of types of specific results. First notification means;
The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation operation accepting unit is different from the specific procedure in the first stage. When the operation is accepted by the user and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the CZ mode, the DZ mode, and the normal mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed, the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape are won. In the case (i.e., when the left-pressed grape 1 or the like is won), the first stop is made and the “banana” is stopped on the winning line, and it becomes impossible to win any of the grapes 1 to 8 Special procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result (the second advantageous operation) And a second informing means for informing a special procedure information can be identified (middle navigation effect) in order).

  According to such a configuration, when specific procedure information is notified, an advantageous display result is derived because the specific procedure can be intentionally operated. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for notification of the specific procedure information.

  Also, when the specific procedure information is not notified, the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the type of the specific result is not stopped in the first stage, and the operation is accepted by a procedure different from the specific procedure. Even when the advantageous display result can be derived when the operation is accepted in the special procedure in the second stage predetermined after the first stage, the special procedure information that can identify the special procedure Can be notified. Therefore, even when the specific procedure information is not notified and the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, the operation is accepted in the special procedure in the second stage thereafter, and It can be expected that special procedures will be notified. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the advantageous display result is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The special procedure described above includes a procedure in which the order in which the plurality of reels constituting the variable display device are stopped is a specific order, a procedure in which the timing at which the derivation operation accepting unit accepts the operation is a specific timing, and a plurality of reels. The order in which the operations are stopped may be in a specific order, and the timing at which the operation is accepted may be a specific timing. Thereby, the variation of a special procedure can be made abundant.

(2) By setting the number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived to a variable display device having a plurality of variable display areas capable of changing the display state. A slot machine (slot machine in the fourth embodiment) in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R for accepting the first to third stops) for accepting an operation for stopping the display state in the variable display area for each of the plurality of variable display areas;
A means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the pre-decision means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, the display state in all of the plurality of variable display areas When the derivation operation accepting unit accepts an operation, the derivation is performed so that the display state in the variable display area corresponding to the operation is stopped and the display state in the variable display area is updated. Control means (reel rotation processing);
A notification means (navigation effect execution process) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect);
The derivation control means is determined in advance when the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (winning black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, or BAR grapes). In the first stage, a specific procedure (first step) for stopping the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the specific result type among the plurality of variable display areas at a timing corresponding to the specific result type When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the advantageous operation procedure, the timing for making the left reel 2L ahead of the right reel 2R and surely winning the grape, see FIG. Regardless of the procedure (second stop, third stop) accepted in the game, control is performed to derive an advantageous display result (any grape) that is advantageous to the player (FIG. 3). The operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the procedure of stopping the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the type of the specific result at a timing different from the timing corresponding to the type of the specific result in the first stage. Even in such a case, the display state of the predetermined variable display area (right reel 2R) is stopped at the timing corresponding to the type of the specific result in the second stage determined after the first stage. When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the special procedure (second advantageous operation procedure) for the purpose, control is performed to derive the advantageous display result (any grape) (see FIG. 32).
The notification means includes
The specific procedure information (complete navigation effect) capable of specifying the specific procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result is notified on the condition that the determination result of the prior determination means is one of the plurality of types of specific results. First notification means;
The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation operation accepting unit is different from the specific procedure in the first stage. When the operation is accepted by the user and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of winning 7 black grapes in the CZ mode, DZ mode, and normal mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed). When the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time but is not operated at the timing to stop the symbol that can reliably win the grape on the winning line, it is determined to execute the intermediate navigation effect according to the intermediate navigation execution ratio. Special procedure information (second navigation operation) that can identify the special procedure (second advantageous operation procedure) corresponding to the type of the specific result And a second informing means for informing.

  According to such a configuration, when specific procedure information is notified, an advantageous display result is derived because the specific procedure can be intentionally operated. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for notification of the specific procedure information.

  Further, when the specific procedure information is not notified, the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the type of the specific result is stopped in the first stage, but it is not stopped at the timing corresponding to the type of the specific result. In addition, even when the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the specific procedure, the advantageous display result is derived when the operation is accepted in the special procedure in the predetermined second stage after the first stage. In addition, special procedure information that can specify the special procedure can be notified. Therefore, even when the specific procedure information is not notified and the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, the operation is accepted in the special procedure in the second stage thereafter, and It can be expected that special procedures will be notified. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the advantageous display result is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Among the above-described multiple types of specific results, the specific procedure and special procedure corresponding to a predetermined type (for example, left-pressed grape) are procedures other than the specific procedure corresponding to a different type (other than left-pressed grape) and This corresponds to a procedure other than the special procedure (FIG. 9). As a result, since it is impossible to intentionally perform a specific procedure or special procedure without knowing the type of the specific result, the advantage of notifying specific procedure information or special procedure information is improved. be able to.

  An advantageous display result derived when an operation is accepted by the derived operation accepting means in a specific procedure in the first stage, and derived when an operation is accepted by the derived operation accepting means in a special procedure in the second stage. The advantageous display results may be the same display results or different display results. Further, an advantageous display result derived when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a specific procedure in the first stage, and when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a special procedure in the second stage The derived advantageous display results may each be a winning display result that generates a predetermined winning, or may be a special display result that does not generate any winning. Thereby, the variation of an advantageous display result can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved.

  When the determination result of the above-described pre-decision unit becomes one of a plurality of types of specific results, the operation is received by the derivation operation reception unit in a specific procedure corresponding to the type of the specific results in the first stage. The advantageous display result derived at the time, and the advantageous display result derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the special procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result in the second stage, Display results derived when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a step different from the specific procedure in the stage and an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the special procedure in the second stage (hereinafter, (I) the game value (medal) earned by the player is higher than (i) the game value after the game. If the display result is such that the degree of advantage is high for the player at least one of the point that is controlled to an advantageous gaming state in (1) and (iii) the point that is not controlled to an unfavorable gaming state in the subsequent game Good (see modification (O)).

  Furthermore, when the procedure for deriving the advantageous display result at the three points (i) to (iii) is different, the three points (i) to (iii) may be comprehensively determined.

  In other words, the advantageous display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantageous display result is that the game value acquired by the player in a game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is one of a plurality of types of specific results. There are more non-advantageous display results than advantageous display results, and even if there is a loss due to the advantageous display result compared to the non-advantageous display result, it becomes the advantageous display result and the subsequent advantageous This is a case where the player acquires a gaming value equal to or greater than the loss compared to a case where the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous as a result of being controlled to a different gaming state.

  The advantage display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantage display result. The game value that the player acquires in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is one of a plurality of types of specific results. There are more non-advantageous display results than advantageous display results, and even if a loss occurs due to the advantageous display result compared to the non-advantageous display result, it is disadvantageous instead of being an unfavorable display result. This is a case where the player obtains a gaming value that is greater than or equal to the loss as compared to a case where the gaming state is controlled to be disadvantageous as a result of not being controlled to a different gaming state.

  In addition, the advantage display result is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous display result is that the player after the non-advantageous display result is more advantageous than the game state after the advantageous display result. The game value that the player acquires in the game is large even if there is a loss afterwards due to the advantageous display result compared to the non-advantageous display result. This is a case in which the player acquires a game value in the game that is equal to or greater than the loss that occurs thereafter compared to the case where the non-advantageous display result is greater than the non-advantageous display result. See Example (8)).

  In addition, when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure including at least one of the specific procedure in the first stage and the special procedure in the second stage, the derivation control means, The control for deriving the advantageous display result may be performed, and the control for not deriving the advantageous display result when the operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure may be performed.

  In addition, the derivation control means performs control so that the non-advantageous display result is not derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the advantageous procedure, and the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform a control for deriving a non-advantageous display result when given.

  Further, the derivation control means derives an advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. You may control so that a ratio may become high.

  In addition, the above derivation control means derives a non-advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform control so that the ratio is lower.

More specifically, the following control may be performed.
The operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result (the procedure including at least one of the specific procedure in the first stage and the special procedure in the second stage as described above). When the operation is accepted in the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of specific result, more game value (medal) is given than when the non-advantageous display result is derived. Control for deriving an advantageous display result to be (paid out) may be performed (see the modification (8)). As a result, in a game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means is one of a plurality of types of specific results, the player is operated by an advantageous procedure rather than a player who is operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in that the game value acquired by the player increases.

  ・ When the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, the non-advantageous display result is controlled, and when the operation is accepted in the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, You may perform control which derives | leads out the advantageous display result used as a state more advantageous for a player than the state after the non-advantageous display result was derived | led-out.

  More specifically, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of specific result, control for deriving a non-advantageous display result that does not involve a transition of the gaming state. When an operation is accepted in accordance with an advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, an advantageous display result accompanied by a transition to a gaming state (for example, RT) more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state It is also possible to perform control for deriving (see modification (8)). In this case, there is no limitation on the game value that the player acquires when the non-advantageous display result is derived and the game value that the player acquires when the advantageous display result is derived. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is the type of specific result, when operated by the advantageous procedure, when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure, In the game after the game, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the game state is controlled to be advantageous.

  Further, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of specific result, a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state Control for deriving non-advantageous display results with transition to, and control for deriving advantageous display results without transition of gaming state when an operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of specific result (Refer to Modification (8)). In this case, the game value that the player acquires when the non-advantageous display result is derived and the game value that the player acquires when the advantageous display result is derived are not important. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is the type of specific result, when operated by the advantageous procedure, when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure, It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the game state after the game is not controlled to an unfavorable gaming state.

  Further, the derivation control means described above is when the determination result of the prior determination means is any one of a plurality of types of specific results, and in any procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage. Even after the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means, when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the special procedure in the second stage, the control for deriving the advantageous display result is performed. It may be. In addition, the derivation control unit described above is a special procedure among the procedures different from the specific procedure in the first stage when the determination result of the prior determination unit is one of a plurality of types of specific results. When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the special procedure in the second stage after the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means, control is performed to derive the advantageous display result. After an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a step different from the specific procedure and the special procedure in the step, when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the special procedure in the second step However, the control for deriving the advantageous display result may not be performed (see the modification (42)). Thereby, the importance of the operation in the first stage can be improved, and the interest in the operation in the first stage can be improved.

  (3) The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation is performed in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage. After the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a special effect (see FIG. 11 (FIG. 11)) before the special procedure information is informed by the second notifying means. b3)) is provided with special effect execution means.

  According to such a configuration, the special effect is executed before the special procedure information is notified. For this reason, the player is surely impressed that the special procedure information is notified, and the joy is given by the notification of the special procedure information. It is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of inconvenience such as operation being performed at this stage.

  (4) The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation is performed in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage. When an operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the timing at which the acceptance operation is started in the second stage by the derivation operation accepting means until a predetermined period elapses ( A delay means for delaying the timing at which the second stop operation is effectively received (see Modification (1)).

  According to such a configuration, when the special procedure information is notified, the operation reception start timing in the second stage is delayed. For this reason, even if the player performs an operation in the second stage during the predetermined period, the operation is not accepted. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the operation in the second stage is accepted in a procedure different from the procedure specified from the special procedure information.

(5) In the advantageous state (RT2) advantageous to the player, the advantageous display result (promotion replay) is not terminated when the advantageous display result (promotion replay) is derived, and the end display result (falling replay) different from the advantageous display result ) Is terminated, and is provided with ending means (processing for ending RT2 in the fall replay winning),
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is any one of the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation control unit performs a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage by the derivation operation reception unit. When the operation is accepted and the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the special procedure in the second stage, control for deriving the end display result is performed (see FIG. 28).

  According to such a configuration, even when the specific procedure information is not notified in the advantageous state and the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, An advantageous display result can be derived when an operation is accepted in a special procedure in the stage, and the derivation of the end display result can be avoided. Therefore, even when the specific procedure information is not notified and the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, the special procedure is notified and the operation is accepted in the special procedure in the second stage. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the advantageous state will continue without ending.

(6) Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state (RT2 in the third embodiment) advantageous to the player when the advantageous display result is derived in a predetermined gaming state (RT1 in the third embodiment). When,
In the predetermined gaming state, when an end display result different from the advantageous display result is derived, a normal state in which the advantageous state is not controlled even when the advantageous display result is derived (the normal state in the third embodiment) A normal state control means for controlling to a gaming state),
When the determination result of the prior determination means is one of the plurality of types of specific results (the left push replay, the middle push replay, or the right push replay in the third embodiment) The winning operation accepting means accepts an operation in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, and accepts an operation in a procedure different from the special procedure in the second stage. Sometimes, control for deriving the end display result is performed (see FIG. 28).

  According to such a configuration, even if the specific procedure information is not notified in the predetermined gaming state and the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, When the operation is accepted in the special procedure at the stage, it is possible to derive the advantageous display result and control it to the advantageous state while avoiding the end display result being derived and controlled to the normal gaming state. Therefore, even when the specific procedure information is not notified and the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, the special procedure is notified and the operation is accepted in the special procedure in the second stage. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for controlling to the advantageous state while avoiding control to the normal gaming state.

(7) A means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means. When the result is one of a plurality of types of special results (winning left push lip, middle push lip, right push lip), and a termination procedure corresponding to the type of the special result (see FIG. 8) When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means, control is performed to derive a predetermined end display result (falling replay), and the derivation operation accepting means performs an avoidance procedure (avoidance procedure) different from the end procedure. When the operation is accepted, derivation control means (reel rotation processing, control for deriving a display result (promotion replay, normal replay) different from the end display result is derived. FIG. 8)
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state (RT1, RT2) more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state (normal gaming state) (processing to control to RT1 when a special outcome is derived, promotion replay winning) Sometimes control to RT2),
When the end display result (falling replay) is derived in the advantageous state, normal state control means for controlling to the normal state (processing to control to the normal gaming state when winning the falling replay),
The notification means includes
Notifying the special result time information (navigation effect) corresponding to the type of the special result on the condition that the determination result of the pre-determining means is one of the multiple types of special results,
When the predetermined period elapses without the end display result being derived during the advantageous state (for example, when 10 games are consumed), the special result time information is more likely to be obtained than before the predetermined period elapses. Notify (control to AT mode)
The advantageous state control means, before the predetermined period elapses, of the plurality of types of special results by the predetermining means according to establishment of a predetermined transition condition (elevation replay winning, special derivation derivation) The first advantageous state (RT1) in which the ratio determined to any one is a predetermined first special result ratio, and a predetermined second special ratio lower than the first special result ratio Transition between a plurality of types of advantageous states including the second advantageous state (RT2), which is a result ratio (see FIG. 6, control to RT2 when a promotion replay is won at RT1, and control to RT1 when a special outcome is derived at RT2. (Refer to Modification (27)).

  According to such a configuration, when the predetermined period elapses without the end display result being derived in the advantageous state, the special result time information is notified with a higher probability than before the predetermined period elapses. For this reason, after the predetermined period has elapsed, when the determination result of the predetermination means becomes a special result, the ratio of deliberately operating in the avoidance procedure and deriving a display result different from the end display result is improved. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation that the predetermined period will elapse without the end display result being derived during the advantageous state.

  Furthermore, before the predetermined period elapses, the ratio at which the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the special result is lower than the first advantageous state that is the first special result ratio and the first special result ratio. A transition is made between a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second advantageous state which is a ratio for the second special result. For this reason, even before the predetermined period elapses, the degree to which the predetermined period elapses without the end display result being derived depends on whether the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is reached. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The termination procedure and the avoidance procedure described above are a procedure in which the order in which the plurality of reels constituting the variable display device are stopped is a specific order (see FIG. 8), and the timing at which the derivation operation accepting unit accepts the operation is specific. There may be a procedure in which the timing and the order in which a plurality of reels are stopped are in a specific order, and the timing at which an operation is received is a specific timing (see Modification (32)). Thereby, the variation of an end procedure and an avoidance procedure can be made abundant.

  Among the plural types of special results described above, the avoidance procedure corresponding to a predetermined type (for example, left pressing lip 1, left pressing lip 2 etc.) is terminated corresponding to a type different from the predetermined type (lip other than left pressing lip). This corresponds to the procedure (FIG. 8). Thereby, since it is impossible to intentionally perform the avoidance procedure in a state where the type of the special result is not known, it is possible to improve the advantage of notifying the special result information.

  The predetermined period described above is a period for digesting the game a predetermined number of times, a period for digesting the game by the number of times determined by lottery from a plurality of types of times, and a determination result of the predetermining means among a plurality of types of special results. This includes the period until the number of operations received in the Kanagawa avoidance procedure reaches the predetermined number of times, the period until the number of times that a specific winning is allowed among a plurality of types of winnings reaches the predetermined number, etc. (Refer to Modification (33)).

  In the above-described second advantageous state, it may be configured such that none of the plurality of types of special results is determined by the predetermining means (see the modified example (34)). Thereby, the expectation with respect to being controlled by the 2nd advantageous state can be improved.

  The larger the difference between the first special result ratio and the second special result ratio is set, the more difficult it is to control in the normal state in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. Therefore, the sharpness can be greatly increased depending on whether or not it is in the second advantageous state.

(8) The derivation control unit is when the determination result of the prior determination unit is any one of the plural types of special results (left pressing lip 1, middle pressing lip 1, right pressing lip 1), The specific display result (elevation replay) is derived on the condition that the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an avoidance procedure different from the termination procedure corresponding to the type of the special result,
The advantageous state control means controls the second advantageous state when the specific display result is derived in the first advantageous state (see FIG. 6).

  According to such a configuration, by avoiding the end display result being derived, the specific display result is derived, and the ratio at which the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the special result is lower than in the first advantageous state. It can be controlled to the second advantageous state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The specific display result may be a display result (promotion replay) that generates a specific winning among a plurality of types of winnings. In this case, when the specific winning is generated in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is controlled, so that the specific winning is generated and further controlled to the second advantageous state. it can.

  Further, in the first advantageous state, when the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of special results, a non-special winning is different from the special winning procedure corresponding to the special result type. When the non-special display result derived when the operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting means in the procedure, the second advantageous state may be controlled (see the modified example (36)). . Accordingly, it is possible to add the interest of being controlled to the second advantageous state instead of being able to generate a winning corresponding to the special result.

The plurality of types of special results include a plurality of types of first special results (left-pressed lip 1, middle-pressed lip 1, right-pressed lip 1) including the fact that the generation of a specific winning in which a winning is generated by becoming a specific display result. ) And a plurality of types of second special results (left-pressed lip 2, middle-pressed lip 2, right-pressed lip 2) that do not include the fact that the occurrence of the specific winning is permitted,
The derivation control means is when the decision result of the prior decision means is one of the plurality of types of first special results (left push lip 1, middle push lip 1, right push lip 1), When an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means with an avoidance procedure different from the termination procedure corresponding to the type of the first special result, a specific display result (promotion replay) for generating the specific winning is derived. Also good. As a result, even when the operation is accepted in the avoidance procedure, there are cases where the specific display result is derived according to the type of the special result and when it is not controlled to the second advantageous state. Interest can be improved.

  Further, the derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means is any one of the plurality of types of special results, and among the avoidance procedures different from the termination procedure corresponding to the types of the special results When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit in the first avoidance procedure, a specific display result (promotion replay) is derived, and the operation is performed by the derivation operation accepting unit in a procedure other than the first avoidance procedure in the avoidance procedure. Is received, a display result (normal replay) different from the end display result and different from the specific display result may be derived (Modification (38)). Thereby, even when the operation is accepted in the avoidance procedure, the specific display result is derived according to whether the operation is performed in the first avoidance procedure or the second avoidance procedure, and the second advantage is obtained. Since it occurs when the state is controlled and when it is not controlled, the interest of the game can be improved.

(9) The derivation control means is a predetermined winning display result corresponding to the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result (left pressed grape, middle pressed grape, right pressed grape). Special display result different from the predetermined prize display result on condition that the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the prize winning procedure for deriving (Grape 1-8, Banana Grape 1-12) (Special appearance) is derived,
The advantageous state control means controls the first advantageous state when the special display result is derived in the second advantageous state (see FIG. 6),
The notification means notifies the predetermined result time information (navigation effect) corresponding to the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result after the predetermined period has elapsed (navigation). Production execution process).

  According to such a configuration, after the predetermined period has elapsed, when the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes the predetermined result, the predetermined winning display result is derived by intentionally operating the winning procedure. In the second advantageous state, it is possible to avoid the special display result from being derived and to be controlled to the first advantageous state, and to improve the fun of the game.

  The advantageous state control means does not control to the first advantageous state when the special display result is derived in the second advantageous state, but when a specific winning occurs in the second advantageous state. You may control to a 1st advantageous state (refer modification (35)). Accordingly, it is possible to add an interest that the first advantageous state is controlled instead of generating a specific winning.

  Further, in the second advantageous state, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes one of a plurality of types of special results, the derivation operation is performed by an avoidance procedure different from the termination procedure corresponding to the special result type. The first advantageous state may be controlled when a predetermined display result derived when the operation is accepted by the accepting unit is derived (see the modified example (35)). Thereby, instead of being able to avoid the control to the normal gaming state, it is possible to add the fun of being controlled to the first advantageous state.

  (10) The informing means, when the specific period has elapsed without the end display result being derived after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 50 games have been consumed, the number of navigation stocks has been reduced to 0, continuation failure) The special result information is notified at a lower probability than before the specific period has elapsed.

  According to such a configuration, even when the special result time information is notified with a high probability, the probability that the special result time information is notified when the specific period elapses decreases. As a result, even when the special result time information is notified with a high probability, the game can be advanced with a sense of tension, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the said alerting | reporting means may alert | report the said special result time information with the same probability as before the said predetermined period passes, when the said specific period passes.

  The specific period mentioned above is a period for digesting the game a predetermined number of times, a period for digesting the game by the number of times determined by lottery from a plurality of types of times, and a determination result of the predetermination means among a plurality of types of special results It is the period until the number of times the special result information is notified reaches a predetermined number of times, the period until the number of times that a specific winning is allowed among a plurality of types of winnings reaches the predetermined number, etc. (Refer to Modification (37)).

(11) Provided with point granting means (see S1, S2, S10 in FIG. 13) for granting points when a predetermined grant condition (point grant condition) is established,
The notification means determines whether the determination result of the prior determination means is the plurality of types of special results according to the amount of points given by the point grant means (total number of grant points) even before the predetermined period has elapsed. Information that is advantageous to the player (navigation effect) is notified when one of them is reached (see Modification (30)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the amount of points given will be the amount of points for which information advantageous to the player is easily notified, and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

  Note that the notification means may notify the advantageous information so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of points given is larger than when the amount of points is small.

  (12) As point information that suggests the amount of points awarded, accurate point information that can correctly identify the amount of points awarded, or points that are less advantageous to the player than the amount of points awarded Point information notification means (see S4, S6, and S8 in FIG. 13) for notifying inaccurate point information whose amount can be specified is provided.

  According to such a configuration, as point information that suggests the amount of points awarded, accurate point information that can correctly identify the amount of points awarded, or more advantageous to the player than the amount of points awarded. Inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points having a low degree is notified. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that a point amount that is actually more advantageous to the player may be given than the amount of points specified from the point information. As a result, information that is advantageous to the player can be easily notified, while a greater sense of expectation can be given than the amount of points specified from the notified point information. Further, even when the amount of points having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player is identified from the notified point information, the amount of points for which information advantageous to the player is more likely to be notified than the amount of the point is determined. Since it may actually be granted, the expectation can be sustained.

The point information notifying means notifies the accurate point information as point information suggesting the updated point for each point updated when the grant condition is satisfied (control for notifying the granted point). Including notification determining means for determining whether or not (S4 in FIG. 13),
When the notification determining means notifies the accurate point information about the point updated when the provision condition is established before the point to be determined is updated, the probability of determining to notify the accurate point information is updated. The determination is made so as to differ depending on whether or not it is determined (see FIGS. 16A and 16B).

  According to such a configuration, the probability of determining that accurate point information is to be notified for each of the points updated after the grant condition is established is determined so that the grant condition is established before the point to be determined is updated. It can be made different depending on whether or not it is already determined to notify the accurate point information about the updated point, that is, whether or not it is determined not to notify the accurate point information. Thus, depending on whether or not it is determined not to notify the accurate point information, the probability of determining that the accurate point information is to be notified for the point updated after the given condition is established is changed. Can be made.

  Note that the above-described notification determining means notifies the accurate point information about the points that have been updated with the given condition established before the point to be determined is updated. Then, the determination may be performed so that the time when it is not determined to notify the accurate point information is higher than when it is determined.

  In this case, when accurate point information is not determined to be reported (that is, accurate point information is notified) than when it is determined to notify accurate point information (that is, when accurate point information is not determined to be notified). Is determined to broadcast accurate point information with a high probability, it was decided not to report further accurate point information, and it was actually updated with the points specified from the point information. It can be prevented that the difference from the point becomes too large and the reliability of the point information is too low.

An external test device (test) that performs processing for causing the variable display device to derive the same display result as when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation procedure based on operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined operation procedure The apparatus 1200) further includes output means (for example, the sub control unit 91 and the input / output board 1100) for outputting recommended operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined recommended operation procedure.
The output means outputs operation procedure information (recommended operation procedure information) according to the determination result by the prior determination means (see FIG. 35, modification (20)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

  The output means outputs information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) (information that can specify the region numbers 1 to 21 for each of the reels 2L to 2R) as the recommended operation procedure information. (Refer to Modification (20)).

  The output means operates as a recommended operation procedure information when a prize determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-decision means is operated in a predetermined first operation procedure (a predetermined small combination is not awarded). Information for specifying a predetermined second operation procedure to be generated with a higher probability than when a stop operation is performed (see Modification (20)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination, (b) is a symbol combination and special combination of a predetermined special appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to an appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating reel control when a fall replay and other replays are elected redundantly. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning a grape. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control in the case of winning a strawberry. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a navigation effect. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the production | presentation state in RT, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a probability state. It is a flowchart for demonstrating point related processing. It is a figure for demonstrating point provision conditions. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for determining a grant point. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing notification lot corresponding to total number. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the production | presentation state lottery when a bonus is won. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for a production | presentation state lottery when a specific combination is won during a bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the production | presentation state lottery when a specific combination is won during game states other than a bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for frequency | count determination. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution ratio determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for continuation determination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and a winning combination in 2nd Embodiment. The combination of the lottery object combination read as the lottery object combination for each gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and a winning combination in 3rd Embodiment. A combination of lottery object combinations read out as a lottery object combination for each gaming state in the third embodiment will be described. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when a replay is won in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a navigation effect in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and a winning combination in 4th Embodiment, (b) is 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the symbol combination of a special appearance previously determined in FIG. A combination of lottery object combinations read out as a lottery object combination for each gaming state in the fourth embodiment will be described. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when the left reel is made to stop for the 1st when any of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a navigation effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing alert | lottery lottery in a modification. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine on which a test apparatus for performing a type test and an input / output board for inputting / outputting test information used for the test are mounted.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “melon”, “banana”, “white grape”, “black grape”, “strawberry”, “blank 1 (white star ), “Blank 2 (black star)”, “Black 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”, etc. A plurality of identifiable symbols are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. . The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 2 and 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are transferred to the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal game described later in this embodiment) MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the state, the preparation mode, and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, and 2 for bonus, medal and bet stored as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the medals used for setting the number (returning medals used for setting credits and bets), game Start switch 7 is operated to start the reels 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired during a big bonus, regular bonus, and RT described later, and when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code indicating the contents and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a. (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. A reset that functions as a setting switch to change the setting value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described later DOO / setting switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) becomes effective, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, the lower stage of the reel 2L, The middle line of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L2 set across the symbols arranged in the upward direction, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the design arranged in a V shape. There are four types of winning lines L3, a lower line of reel 2L, a middle part of reel 2C, a lower part of reel 2R, that is, a winning line L4 set across a reverse V-shaped pattern. In the normal gaming state, the preparation mode, the RT, the big bonus, and the regular bonus, all of the pay lines L1 to L4 are set when a predetermined number of bets are set. It becomes effective. Note that the winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L4. For example, the line extending over the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the line extending over the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. Further, it may include a line extending over the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L4. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, or 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L4, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds). The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Execute. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the set value, when the power of the slot machine 1 is in the ON state, it is necessary to turn it off once, and after the setting key switch 37 is turned on, the power of the slot machine 1 needs to be turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the game shifts to a state where the game can be started by setting the bet number. It should be noted that when the power of the slot machine 1 is in an ON state, an operation for turning it OFF once, an operation for turning the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned ON, an operation of the reset / setting switch 38, An operation necessary for setting the set value, such as an operation of the start switch 7 for confirming the set value, is referred to as a setting change operation. The setting change operation is not limited to such an operation, and may be any operation as long as it is an operation for setting a setting value.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game (small role, replay ) And a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the end of each game, at the time of winning and setting changes Winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when changing to the setting change mode), gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games This is a work in which the number of remaining games controlled by the RT is stored when the game state is completed (for example, a normal game state described later). In the special work, an example in which the number of remaining games is stored will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games digested after being controlled in the gaming state may be stored.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  Even in the case of shifting to the setting change mode, in principle, information regarding the gaming state (the type of gaming state and the number of remaining games when in the normal gaming state) before the setting changing mode is maintained. Thereby, for example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT, the game state is controlled such that the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained even after the mode change mode is changed. In addition, when the game is shifted to the setting change mode during the normal game state that ends when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, the number of remaining games is also maintained. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, in the case of shifting to the setting change mode during the bonus winning, the winning flag of the bonus is initialized, and when winning in the bonus lottery, the winning flag can be set again and the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained. Controlled by the state. For this reason, in principle, an area in which a game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored is not initialized in connection with the setting change. As an exception, for example, when the gaming state before transition to the setting change mode is a bonus, a gaming state flag indicating, for example, a preparation mode is stored in relation to the setting change.

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and is performed when a change to the setting change mode is performed, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. Yes, in initialization 0, all areas (unused area and unused area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c except for the in-use stack area and the area where the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored (Including the stack area) is initialized and controlled to the initial gaming state.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed when only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the stack in use in the storage area of the RAM 41c. The area, the area in which the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored, and all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, an example in which initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed at the end of the setting change mode will be described. However, the first game before the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, or after the setting change is performed. May be performed until the start is started (until the start switch 7 is operated). In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to a symbol combination and a special appearance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a preparation mode controlled after the bonus is completed by the main control unit 41, a predetermined condition is established (a special mode stop in the preparation mode or RT2 described later, or normal Predetermined end conditions in the advantageous states such as RT2, RT1, and RT2 controlled when RT1 and RT1 are controlled by playing (32 games in the gaming state) and RT1 are fulfilled (advanced replay winning will be described later) This is controlled to any one of a normal gaming state controlled by establishing (a fall replay winning to be described later), an internal medium RT controlled when a bonus is won, and a bonus controlled by a bonus winning. RT1 and RT2 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than the preparation mode and the normal gaming state in that the winning rate of the re-gamer is extremely high as will be described later. RT1 and RT2 may be referred to as RT, an advantageous state, or the like.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, normal gaming state, internal RT, and bonus.

  Referring to FIG. 5A, the special combination among the winning combinations includes five types of bonuses of big bonuses 1 to 5 (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB).

  BB1 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB2 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB3 is awarded when the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB4 is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB5 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB3, the game shifts to a bonus that is controlled every game to regular bonus 1 (hereinafter referred to as RB1). Further, when any of BB4 to BB5 is won, the game is shifted to a regular bonus 2 (hereinafter referred to as RB2) which is controlled by each game.

  While the gaming state is in the bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of BB won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, during the regular bonus, a regular bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of RB is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the corresponding regular bonus medium flag is set to the ON state every time the game is started.

  The bonus generated due to the winning of any one of BB1 to BB3 is terminated on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out. Bonuses resulting from winning of BB4 or BB5 are terminated on condition that 73 or more medals have been paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game state is controlled to the inside RT from when BB1 to BB5 are internally won until winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  When the big bonus is won, after the big bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the big bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are invalidated except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the game cannot be progressed. Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated. Also, as shown in FIG. 6, after the big bonus is over, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode.

  Even if one of BB1 to BB5 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will win these roles. There is nothing. The symbols constituting “BB1” to “BB5” (“black 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”) are not arranged within 7 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, but 5 in the middle reel 2C. This is because they are not arranged within the frame.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, small roles include grape 1 to grape 8, banana grape 1 to banana grape 12, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 2, one piece 1, and one piece 2.

  Among the small roles, melon is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When melon wins, 3 medals are paid out. Even if the melon is won, it will not win if the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbols constituting the melon ("melon") are not arranged within 7 frames on the left reel 2L and are not arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C.

  Next, among the small roles, strawberry 1 becomes a winning when the symbol “strawberry-banana-banana” is derived to any of the winning lines, and one medal is paid out. Among the small roles, strawberry 2 is awarded when the symbol “strawberry” is derived to one of the winning lines for reel 2 </ b> C, and a medal is paid out. In addition, when strawberry 2 wins, since it becomes a prize in all the winning lines L1-L4, four medals are paid out.

  Next, out of the small combinations, the single combination 1 becomes a winning when the symbol “blank 2-blank 2-BAR” is derived to any of the winning lines, and one medal is paid out. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, points are awarded on the condition that melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 2, and one-piece combination 1 are won.

  Of the small combinations, the single combination 2 becomes a winning when the symbol “BAR-white 7-white 7” is derived to any of the winning lines, and one medal is paid out. As will be described later, the single winning combination 2 is set to be able to win only during RB1. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when one winning combination 2 is won, points are always given and navigation stock is given.

  Next, grapes 1 to 8 will be described. Grape 1 is awarded when a combination of “black grapes—black grapes—black grapes” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Grape 2 is awarded when a combination of “black grapes—black grapes—white grapes” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The grape 3 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-black grape-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. Grapes 4 are awarded when a combination of “black grapes—white grapes—black grapes” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The grape 5 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-white grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The grape 6 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-black grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The grape 7 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-white grape-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The grape 8 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-white grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the symbols constituting each of the grapes 1 to 8 are not arranged within 7 frames on the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, but are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Absent. For this reason, even if one of the grapes 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles, it will be won. There will be no prizes for the grapes.

  However, as will be described later, grapes 1 to 8 are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination and won simultaneously. In addition, either “black grape” or “white grape” is arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. In addition, as described above, the grapes 1 to 8 are all eight combinations that can be composed of “black grapes” and “white grapes”. For this reason, when the grapes 1 to 8 are won, in principle, any of the grapes can be won.

  Next, banana grapes 1 to 12 will be described. The banana grape 1 is awarded when a combination of “banana-black grape-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 2 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-black grape-banana” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 3 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-banana-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 4 is awarded when a combination of “banana-white grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 5 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-white grape-banana” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 6 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-banana-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 7 is awarded when a combination of “banana-black grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 8 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-white grape-banana” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 9 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-banana-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 10 is awarded when a combination of “banana-white grape-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The banana grape 11 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-black grape-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The banana grape 12 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-banana-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, among the symbols constituting each of the banana grapes 1 to 12, “banana” is arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. However, each of “black grape” and “white grape” is not arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, but is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Absent. For this reason, even if one of the banana grapes 1 to 12 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R corresponding to the “black grape” and “white grape” of the selected banana grape are set. If you do not operate at the right time to win, you will not win the winning banana grapes.

  When any of the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grapes 1 to 12 wins, nine medals are paid out.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replay game includes normal replay, promotion replay, fall replay 1, fall replay 2, control replay 1, and control replay 2. When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets that you no longer need to set in the next game This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  The normal replay is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the normal replay (“banana”) are arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Therefore, as a general rule, it can be said that the normal replay is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is made.

  The promotion replay is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the promotion replay (“banana”, “melon”) are arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the promotion replay can be a prize that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is elected.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after winning the promotion replay in RT1, RT2 is controlled. As will be described later, the promotion replay is set not to win in the internal lottery in the preparation mode, and is set to win with a predetermined probability in the internal lottery in RT1. For this reason, no promotion replay is awarded in the preparation mode. Further, even if a player wins the promotion replay in the normal gaming state, the RT2 is not controlled. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled by RT2 from the preparation mode or the normal gaming state, and is configured to receive a promotion replay prize only when it is RT1 and to be controlled by RT2 only from the RT1 concerned.

  In addition, even in a gaming state other than RT1 (for example, a preparation mode), the promotion replay can be selected and won by a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%), and RT2 can be selected from gaming states other than RT1. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by.

  The fall replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The fall replay 2 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-white grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Of the symbols constituting each of the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2, the left reel 2L is arranged within 7 frames and the middle reel 2C is arranged within 5 frames, but the right reel 2R symbol (“black”). Grapes "" White grapes ") are not placed within 7 frames.

  However, as will be described later, since the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 are won simultaneously, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 8R, one of the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 constitutes the right reel 2R. The symbol can be drawn into the winning line. For this reason, the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, as a general rule, if they are won.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after winning the fall replay at RT1 or RT2, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state. As will be described later, the fall replay is set not to win in the internal lottery in the preparation mode, and is set to win with a predetermined probability in the internal lottery in RT1 or RT2. For this reason, since it does not win the fall replay in the preparation mode, it is configured not to be controlled to the normal gaming state from the preparation mode, and is configured to be controlled to the normal gaming state by the fall replay winning only from RT1 or RT2. Yes.

  It should be noted that even when in a gaming state other than RT1 (for example, a preparation mode), a falling replay can be selected and won with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%). You may comprise so that it may be controlled by a gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, after falling into replay win at RT1 or RT2 and controlled to the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to RT1 again by digesting 32 games in the normal gaming state. .

  The control replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “banana-white 7-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The control replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “banana-blank 2-banana” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Of the symbols constituting each of the control replay 1 and the control replay 2, the symbols of the reels 2L and 2R ("bananas") are arranged within 7 frames in each reel, but the symbols of the middle reel 2C (" White 7 ”and“ Blank 2 ”) are not arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, even if the control replay is won in the internal lottery, the control replay will not be won unless the stop switch 8C is operated at an appropriate timing. However, as will be described later, since the control replay 1 and the control replay 2 are won simultaneously with the promotion replay and the fall replay, the symbols constituting the promotion replay and the fall replay are determined regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 8C. You can draw into the winning line. Therefore, in principle, the control replay 1 and the control replay 2 cannot be won even if they are won, but it can be said that they can win either of the replays to be won at the same time.

  Next, the special appearance will be described with reference to FIG. The special appearance includes 16 kinds of symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5B such as “banana-melon-black grape”. In this embodiment, the reel control for stopping at any of the special pay lines L1 to L4 in this embodiment is when the player wins any of the grapes 1 to 8 in any gaming state. This is performed when a banana grape is dropped when a banana grape is selected at the same time as the vine grape is selected. As a result, when one of the grapes 1 to 8 is won, the symbol constituting the selected grape cannot be stopped by any of the winning lines L1 to L4, and the banana If you are winning the grapes at the same time and the symbols that make up the winning banana grapes cannot be stopped by any of the winning lines L1 to L4, Can be stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after the special event stops in the preparation mode or RT2, it is controlled to RT1. RT1 is continuously controlled until a bonus is won, a promotion replay is won, or a fall replay is won. Even if the special game is stopped in the game mode other than the preparation mode or RT2, it is not controlled by RT1. Even if the special outcome is stopped at RT1, the control to RT1 is maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the combination of the lottery object combination read as the lottery object role for each gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the combination of the lottery object combinations varies depending on which game state is in effect. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. In FIG. 7, “+” is indicated between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery.

  In FIG. 7, the lottery target combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that the lottery target is read out in the gaming state, and a cross indicates the lottery target when in the gaming state. This indicates that the combination is not read out. Also, the numerical value shown below the circle in FIG. 7 indicates the number of determination values of a predetermined set value (for example, set value 1). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group Role, BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, 1 piece 1, grapes, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, middle pressed grape 1, middle pressed Grape 2, right-pressed grape 1, right-pressed grape 2, normal replay, promoted replay, and fall-down replay are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as targets for internal lottery.

  In addition, each role of a small role group means each of normal replay, promotion replay, fall replay, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 single-player role 1, and single-player role 1. Further, the fall replay refers to each of the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2. Thus, for example, each role of the BB1 + small role group is BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + promotion replay, BB1 + fall replay 1, BB1 + fall replay 2, BB1 + melon, BB1 + strawberry 1, BB1 + strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, BB1 + strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 It shows that the combination of each of the winning combination 1 and BB1 + 1 winning combination 1 is read and the internal lottery is performed.

  The left-pressed grape 1 refers to grape + banana grape 2 + banana grape 9. Left-pressed grape 2 refers to grape + banana grape 5 + banana grape 12. The medium pressed grape 1 means grape + banana grape 4 + banana grape 8. The medium-pressed grape 2 refers to grape + banana grape 7 + banana grape 11. Right-pressed grape 1 means grape + banana grape 1 + banana grape 3. The right-pressed grape 2 refers to grape + banana grape 10 + banana grape 6. The grapes in the left, middle and right pressed grapes 1 and 2 refer to grape 1 + grape 2 + grape 3 + ... + grape 8. Therefore, for example, the left-pressed grape 1 indicates that the grapes 1 to 8, the banana grape 2, and the banana grape 9 are read and an internal lottery is performed.

  When the game state is the preparation mode, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group , BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, 1 piece 1, grape, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, medium pressed grape 1, medium pressed grape 2, right-pressed grape 1, right-pressed grape 2, and normal replay are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT1, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group, BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, 1 piece 1, grape, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, medium pressed grape 1, medium pressed grape 2 , Right push grape 1, right push grape 2, normal replay, left push lip 1, left push lip 2, middle push lip 1, middle push lip 2, right push lip 1, right push lip 2 are subject to internal lottery, internal lottery Are sequentially read as target roles.

  The left push lip 1 means promotion replay + falling replay + control replay 1. The left-pressed lip 2 refers to normal replay + falling replay + control replay 1. The middle push lip 1 means promotion replay + falling replay. The middle press lip 2 means normal replay + falling replay. The right push lip 1 means promotion replay + falling replay + control replay 2. The right push lip 2 refers to normal replay + falling replay + control replay 2. The fall replay in the left, middle, and right push lips 1 and 2 refers to the fall replay 1 + the fall replay 2. Thus, for example, the left push lip 1 indicates that the promotion replay, the fall replay 1, the fall replay 2, and the control replay 1 are read and an internal lottery is performed.

  When the gaming state is RT2, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group, BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, 1 piece 1, grape, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, medium pressed grape 1, medium pressed grape 2 , Right push grape 1, right push grape 2, normal replay, promotion replay, left push lip 1, left push lip 2, middle push lip 1, middle push lip 2, right push lip 1, right push lip 2 are subject to internal lottery , And sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery.

  When the game state is RT in the inside, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group, BB5 + small role group, Melon, Strawberry 1, Strawberry 1 + Strawberry 2, Strawberry 1 + Strawberry 2 + 1 Sheet 1, 1 Sheet 1, Grapes, Left pressed grape 1, Left pressed grape 2, Middle pressed grape 1, Middle pressed grape 2, Right pressed grape 1, Right pressed Grape 2, normal replay, promotion replay, fall replay, left push lip 1, left push lip 2, middle push lip 1, middle push lip 2, right push lip 1, right push lip 2 are subject to internal lottery and subject to internal lottery It is sequentially read as a role. In the internal RT, even if the BB is read at the same time as the small role group and won, the winning flag of the BB that triggered the control of the internal RT is maintained.

  When the game state is RB1, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 player role, 1 player role 1, 1 player role 2, all small roles are subject to internal lottery, and are subject to internal lottery It is sequentially read as a role. All small roles refer to grapes 1-8 + banana grapes 1-12 + melon + strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 sheet 1 Further, when the gaming state is RB2, all the small combinations are targeted for internal lottery and are read out as targets for internal lottery.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, the variable display device 2 determines whether or not each of the winning combinations described above is permitted, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to perform control for aligning with any winning line. Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the number.

  In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and a special combination with any of the general combination The range of judgment values to be won in combination with roles is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general role and a special role are simultaneously won in one game. It can happen. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are subject to the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the bonus internal lottery increases as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  In addition, the bonus and each role of the small role group can be won at the same time, but among the small role groups, the probability of winning simultaneously with the bonus is highest for Strawberry 1 + Strawberry 2 + 1 role 1 and then Strawberry 1 + Strawberry 2 The number of determination values is set in the order of strawberry 1, melon.

  Next, paying attention to the number of determination values of the re-game player in FIG. 7, the re-game game winning probability is compared for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, “7435” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “500” is the number of determination values when the promotion replay is read, and the fall replay (falling replay 1 + falling replay 2). “1000” is set as the number of determination values at the time of reading. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a promotion replay or a fall replay can be won and awarded. However, as shown in FIG. 6, the normal gaming state is terminated by winning a bonus or by playing the game a predetermined number of times, so that the normal gaming state is maintained without being controlled by RT by winning the promotion replay or falling replay. The

  In the preparation mode, “8935” is set as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read. As the number of determination values for normal replay in the preparation mode in the present embodiment, the total number of determination values for normal replay, promotion replay, and fall replay when in the normal gaming state is set. Therefore, in the preparation mode, the normal game state and the replay winning probability are set to be the same.

  In the preparation mode in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which promotion replay and fall replay are not read as a lottery target role and are not won, but this is not limiting, and promotion replay and fall replay is read as a lottery target role. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the player can win with a predetermined probability and win. When configured in this way, for example, in the preparation mode, when the promotion replay is won, the game may be controlled to RT2, and when the fall replay is won, the normal game state may be controlled.

  When it is RT1, “2750” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, “2200” is determined as the number of determination values when the left push lip 1 is read, and the determination value when the left push lip 2 is read. “12250” as the number, “2200” as the determination value when the middle press lip 1 is read, “12250” as the determination value when the middle press lip 2 is read, and when the right press lip 1 is read. “2200” is set as the number of determination values, and “12250” is set as the number of determination values when the right push lip 2 is read.

  In this embodiment, “46100” is set as the total determination value number of replays in RT1, and “6600” is set as the total determination value number of promotion replays in RT1, and the total determination of fall replays in RT1 “36750” is set as the number of values.

  When it is RT2, “40650” is read as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “100” is read as the number of determination values when the promoted replay is read, and each of the left push lip 1 and the right push lip 2 is read. “1100” is set as the number of determination values at that time.

  In this embodiment, “47350” is set as the total determination value number of replays in RT2, and “6600” is set as the total determination value number of fall replays in RT2.

As described above, the probability of winning one of the replays in each of the normal gaming state, the preparation mode, RT1, and RT2 is as follows from the total number of determination values assigned.
Replay winning probability when in normal gaming state 8935/65536
Replay win probability when in preparation mode ... 8935/65536
Replay winning probability when RT1 is 46100/65536
Replay winning probability when RT2 ... 47350/65536
Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning either replay is set to be high when it is RT1 and RT2, and is set to be low when in the normal gaming state and the preparation mode. Therefore, it can be said that RT1 and RT2 are advantageous to the player in that the winning probability of replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state or the preparation mode. Further, it is set so that the probability of winning one of the replays is higher when RT2 than RT1.

Next, in RT1 or RT2, attention is paid to the winning probability of falling replay to be shifted to the normal gaming state. The probability of winning the fall replay is as follows from the total number of judgment values assigned.
Fall replay winning probability when RT1 ... 43350/65536
Fall Replay Winning Probability for RT2 6600/65536
Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the fall replay is set to be lower at RT2 than at RT1. That is, the probability that RT is maintained is higher and the probability of falling into the normal gaming state is lower when RT2 is compared with when RT1 is. Further, as described above, it is set so that the probability of winning one of the replays is higher when RT2 is selected than RT1. For this reason, it can be said that it is a more advantageous state for the player when it is RT2 than when it is RT1.

Next, pay attention to the winning probability of the promotion replay to be shifted to RT2 in RT1. The probability of winning the promotion replay is as follows based on the total number of determination values assigned.
Promotion Replay Winning Probability when RT1 6600/65536
Thus, in RT1, the fall replay winning probability is set to be higher than the promoted replay winning probability.

  When winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are 1 to 21 (see FIG. 1) from the reel reference position. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  When a special role has been carried over from before the previous game and a small role (such as strawberry 1, melon, grape 1, etc.) is won, the selected small role is drawn to the winning line to the maximum in a range of 4 frames. As for the stop operation position where the number of winning draws is fixed and the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, the winning special role is maximized within the 4 lines within the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in is prepared, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the normal small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed.

  For example, when a special combination and grapes with a payout number of more than 3 are selected, reel control is performed preferentially to increase the number of grapes by winning the special combination before winning the special combination, which is advantageous to the player. . When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  In the reel control, an example is described in which reel control is performed in which a small role is preferentially aligned on a winning line over a special role. However, not all small roles are preferentially aligned over a special role. A small role in which medals greater than or equal to the number of bets are paid out among small roles (a small role in which 3 or more medals are paid out when the bet number is 3, for example, a grape that pays out 9 medals by winning a prize, hereinafter also referred to as a normal small role) ) Is preferentially aligned, and a small combination in which medals smaller than the number of bets are paid out (if the bet number is 3, a small combination in which medals of less than 3 are paid out, for example, strawberry 1, etc. With respect to the combination of the special combination, the reel control may be performed so that the special combination is preferentially aligned on the winning line. Thereby, even if winning is made, it is possible to prevent the reel control from being preferentially aligned even for the small role that is disadvantageous for the player because the payout is less than the bet amount.

  Next, if the special role and the replaying role are won at the same time (BB1 + normal replay, etc.), such as when the replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the selected replay A stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined so as to draw the game player into the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a plurality of types of re-game players are won at the same time (for example, left-pressed lip 1), as shown in FIG. 8, the types of re-game players won at the same time and the reels that were initially stopped ( Control is performed so that the re-playing combination determined in accordance with whether the first stopped reel) is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel is aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. It is. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a fall replay and another replay are won in duplicate.

  For example, when the left push lip 1 is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the combination of the promoted replays among the selected re-game players is aligned with any winning line and stopped. As shown in FIG. 3, symbols constituting the promotion replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on the middle reel 2C, and the winning line Since L1 to L4 are set, when the left reel 2L is first stopped when the left push lip 1 is won, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, Reel control is performed so that the promotion replay always wins.

  On the other hand, when the left push lip 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the combination of the falling replay 1 or the falling replay 2 among the selected replaying players is placed on any winning line. Control to stop at the same time. As shown in FIG. 3, the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 are not operated within 7 frames because the symbols of the right reel 2R (“black grape” and “white grape”) are not arranged within 7 frames. I miss it by timing. However, since the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 are won simultaneously, the symbols (“black grape” and “white grape”) of the right reel 2R can be stopped on the winning line regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 8R. The reel control is performed so that the falling replay always wins.

  Further, when the left push lip 2 is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected re-game players is aligned with any winning line and stopped. As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on the left reel 2L and right reel 2R, are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on the middle reel 2C, and the winning line Since L1 to L4 are set as follows, if the left reel 2L is first stopped when the left push lip 2 is won, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, The reel control is performed so that the normal replay always wins.

  On the other hand, when the left push lip 2 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the combination of the falling replay 1 or the falling replay 2 among the selected replaying players is placed on any winning line. Control to stop at the same time.

  As described above, when the left push lip 1 or the left push lip 2 is won, the reel control is performed so that when the left reel 2L is first stopped, the promotion replay or the normal replay is won, and the left reel 2L Reel control is performed so that a tumble replay is awarded when the other is first stopped.

  Similarly, when the middle push lip 1 or the middle push lip 2 is won, reel control is performed so that when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the promotion replay or the normal replay is won, and the reels other than the middle reel 2C are selected. Reel control is performed so as to win a fall replay when one is stopped.

  Similarly, when the right push lip 1 or the right push lip 2 is won, the reel control is performed so that when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the promotion replay or the normal replay is won, and other than the right reel 2R. The reel control is performed so that the falling replay is won when the first stop is made.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is promoted by avoiding the falling replay prize depending on whether the left push lip 1 or 2 is won, the middle push lip 1 or 2 is won, or the right push lip 1 or 2 is won. By changing the first stop reel for replay or normal replay winning, the operation procedure (avoidance procedure) for maintaining RT can be made different.

  Further, depending on whether the left push lip 1 has been won, the middle push lip 1 has been won, or the right push lip 1 has been won, the fall stop replay winning is avoided and the first stop reel for making the promotion replay winning is different. Thus, for example, an operation procedure (promotion procedure) for promoting from RT1 to RT2 can be varied.

In the case where the reel control is performed as described above, the probability of winning the fall replay when the fall replay is won is 1/3. Further, as described above, the probability of winning the fall replay at RT1 or RT2 is 43350/65536 when RT1 and 6600/65536 when RT2. From these, in RT1 or RT2, the probability of winning the fall replay and falling to the normal gaming state when the performance state is not the AT mode described later is as follows.
Falling probability when RT1 is 43350 / (65536 × 3) ≈ 1/5
Falling probability when RT2 is 6600 / (65536 × 3) ≈1 / 30
Accordingly, in the present embodiment, when the production state is not the AT mode described later, the fall replay is won once in about 5 games in RT1 and once in about 30 games in RT2.

  Next, when multiple types of small roles are selected at the same time (strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, grapes 1-8, etc.), small roles with a large number of payouts are given priority over small roles with a small number of payouts. Reel control for drawing into the line is performed.

  As a case where multiple types of small roles are simultaneously elected, grapes (grape 1 to 8), left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, middle pressed grape 1, middle pressed grape 2, right pressed grape 1, and right pressed grape 2 As shown in FIG. 9, the types of grapes and banana grapes that were won at the same time and the reel that was first stopped (first stopped reel) are the left reel, middle as shown in FIG. Depending on whether it is a reel or a right reel, the grapes are controlled to be aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a grape is won.

  For example, when banana grapes are won without winning at the same time, any one of grapes 1 to 8 regardless of the type of reel that is stopped first and the operation timing of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Reel control is performed so that Kaga always wins. As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting each of the grapes 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on the middle reel 2C. In addition, since L1 to L4 are set as the winning lines, the reels so that any one of the grapes 1 to 8 always wins regardless of the operation procedure (stop order, stop timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Control is performed.

  On the other hand, when one of the left pushed grape 1, left pushed grape 1, middle pushed grape 1, middle pushed grape 2, right pushed grape 1, and right pushed grape 2 is won, the following reel control is performed.

First, the case where the left pressed grape 1 is won will be described.
If the left pressed grape 1 is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, regardless of the operation procedure for stopping the second and third stops, one of the selected grapes 1 to 8 is selected as the winning line. The reel is controlled to stop at the same time. The second stop means that the reel is stopped second after the first stop. The third stop is to stop the third reel that has been rotated to the end after the second stop.

  On the other hand, when the left pressed grape 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to draw the “banana” of the first stopped reel onto the winning line. . “Banana” is not a symbol constituting grapes 1-8. When “banana” stops on the winning line, “black grapes” or “white grapes” constituting the grapes 1 to 8 on any reel are displayed on the winning line from the symbol arrangement of each reel shown in FIG. Never stop. For example, when “banana” on the left reel 2L stops at the upper stage, neither “black grape” nor “white grape” stops at the lower stage. For this reason, when the left-pressed grape 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is first stopped, all the grapes 1 to 8 among the selected grapes can be stopped in line with the winning line. Disappear. However, the left-pressed grape 1 includes a banana grape 9 having a “banana” on the middle reel 2C as a constituent symbol and a banana grape 2 having a “banana” on the right reel 2R as a constituent symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the banana grape 2 are not arranged within 7 frames of the symbols of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C (“black grapes”). In addition, the symbols constituting the banana grape 9 are not arranged within 7 frames for each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R ("black grape", "white grape").

  Therefore, when the left-pressed grape 1 is won and the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the “banana” of the middle reel 2C is stopped on the winning line, so the “black grape” of the left reel 2L, When the second stop and the third stop are performed at the stop timing at which the “white grape” on the reel 2R is stopped on the winning line, the banana grape 9 is won.

  Further, when the left pressed grape 1 is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the “banana” on the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line, so the “black grape” on the left reel 2L, the middle When the second stop and the third stop are performed at the stop timing at which the “black grape” on the reel 2C is stopped on the winning line, the banana grape 2 is won.

  Thus, even when the left-pressed grape 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, it is possible to draw the constituent symbols of the banana grapes that are likely to be won on the winning line. The banana grape 2 or 9 can be won only when the second stop and the third stop are performed according to the operation procedure as the stop timing.

  On the other hand, when the left-pressed grape 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is first stopped, the operation becomes the stop timing at which the constituent symbols of the banana grapes that are likely to win can be drawn on the winning line. When the second stop and the third stop are not performed in the procedure, any of the special outcomes shown in FIG. 5B is derived without winning any of the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grapes 2 and 9. obtain.

Next, the case where the left pressed grape 2 is won will be described.
If the left pressed grape 2 is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, regardless of the operation procedure for stopping the second and third stops, one of the selected grapes 1 to 8 is selected as the winning line. The reel is controlled to stop at the same time.

  On the other hand, when the left pressed grape 2 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to draw the “banana” of the first stopped reel onto the winning line. Therefore, none of grapes 1 to 8 among the selected grapes can be stopped in line with the winning line. However, the left pushed grape 2 includes a banana grape 12 having a “banana” on the middle reel 2C as a constituent symbol and a banana grape 5 having a “banana” on the right reel 2R as a constituent symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the banana grape 5 are not arranged within 7 frames of the symbols of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C (“white grapes”). In addition, the symbols constituting the banana grape 12 are not arranged within 7 frames for each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R ("white grape", "black grape").

  Therefore, when the left pressed grape 2 is won and the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the “banana” of the middle reel 2C is stopped on the winning line, so the “white grape” of the left reel 2L, When the second stop and the third stop are performed according to the operation procedure that is the stop timing for stopping the “black grapes” on the reel 2R on the winning line, the banana grapes 12 are won.

  Further, when the left pressed grape 2 is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the “banana” on the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line, so the “white grape” on the left reel 2L, When the second stop and the third stop are performed according to the operation procedure that is the stop timing for stopping the “white grape” on the reel 2C on the winning line, the banana grape 5 is won.

  In this way, even if the left-pressed grape 2 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, it is possible to draw the constituent symbols of the banana grape that can be won on the winning line. The banana grape 5 or 12 can be won only when the second stop and the third stop are performed according to the operation procedure as the stop timing.

  On the other hand, when the left-pressed grape 2 is selected and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is first stopped, the operation becomes the stop timing at which the constituent symbols of the banana grapes that are likely to win can be drawn on the winning line. When the second stop and the third stop are not performed in the procedure, none of the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grapes 5 and 12 are won, and any of the special outcomes shown in FIG. 5B is derived. obtain.

  In addition, when the middle pressed grape 1 is won, reel control is performed to ensure that any of the grapes 1 to 8 is won when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time. When stopped, when the second and third stops are made in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana grape 4 and the banana grape 8 of which the possibility of winning a prize remains can be drawn on the winning line. Only the reel control is performed so as to win the corresponding banana grape, and in any other case, any special outcome can be derived without winning.

  In addition, when the middle pressed grape 2 is won, reel control is performed to ensure that any of the grapes 1 to 8 is won when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time. When stopped, when the second and third stops are made in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana grape 7 and banana grapes 11 of which the possibility of winning a prize remains can be drawn on the winning line Only the reel control is performed so as to win the corresponding banana grape, and in any other case, any special outcome can be derived without winning.

  In addition, when the right-pressed grape 1 is won, reel control is performed to ensure that any of the grapes 1 to 8 is awarded when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time. When one stop was made, the second and third stops were made in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana grape 1 and the banana grape 3 with the possibility of winning could be drawn on the winning line. Only when the reel control is performed to win the corresponding banana grape, in any other case, any special outcome can be derived without winning.

  When the right-pressed grape 2 is won, the reel control is performed to ensure that any of the grapes 1 to 8 is won when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time. When one stop was made, the second and third stops were made in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana grape 6 and the banana grape 10 that could be won could be drawn on the winning line. Only when the reel control is performed to win the corresponding banana grape, in any other case, any special outcome can be derived without winning.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the grapes 1 to 8 are surely won according to whether the left pressed grape 1 or 2 is won, the middle pressed grape 1 or 2 is won, or the right pressed grape 1 or 2 is won. The first stop reel can be made different. Even when “banana” stops on the winning line due to the first stop, the left pressed grape 1, the left pressed grape 2, the middle pressed grape 1, the middle pressed grape 2, the right pressed grape 1, and the right pressed grape 2 Depending on which of them is won, the operation procedure (second stop and third stop operation timing) for winning the corresponding banana grape can be made different. Accordingly, an operation for winning a grape according to which of the left pressed grape 1, the left pressed grape 2, the middle pressed grape 1, the middle pressed grape 2, the right pressed grape 1, and the right pressed grape 2 is won. The procedure, the operation procedure for winning the banana grape, and the operation procedure for avoiding the special event derivation (control to RT1) can be varied.

  Next, the reel control when the strawberry 1 is won will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, for strawberry 1, when winning alone, when winning simultaneously with strawberry 2, there are cases where strawberry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 is won simultaneously, and reel control is performed as shown in FIG. Done.

  First, when the strawberry 1 is elected alone, reel control is performed to preferentially draw “strawberry-banana-banana” which is a symbol constituting the strawberry 1 into any of the winning lines. As shown in FIG. 3, among the symbols constituting the strawberry 1, “banana” which is a symbol of each of the middle reel 2 </ b> C and the right reel 2 </ b> R is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or 7 frames, but the left reel Since “2strawberry” symbols “strawberry” are not arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less, reel control is performed so that a winning is made according to the stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L.

  Next, when strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 is won, reel control is performed so that “strawberry” in the left reel 2L and “strawberry” in the middle reel 2C are preferentially drawn into any of the winning lines. If the “strawberry” of the middle reel 2C cannot be drawn on the winning line, that is, if the strawberry 2 is missed, reel control for winning the strawberry 1 is performed. As a result, as long as the pull-in is possible, the “strawberry” can be stopped on the winning line with the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C. For the right reel 2R, reel control is performed to draw “banana” onto the winning line, and for “strawberry”, reel control is performed so as not to be pulled at least to the winning line. That is, when strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 is won, reel control is performed so that “strawberry” can be stopped in alignment with the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, but is not stopped in alignment with the right reel 2R. .

  When winning strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 role 1, "Strawberry" on the left reel 2L, "Strawberry" on the middle reel 2C, and "Strawberry" on the right reel 2R are given priority in any of the winning lines. Pull-in reel control is performed. Accordingly, as long as the pull-in is possible, the “strawberry” can be stopped on the winning line with the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. That is, when the strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 is won, reel control is performed so that the “strawberry” can be stopped in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. If the “strawberry” of the middle reel 2C cannot be drawn on the winning line, that is, if the strawberry 2 is missed, reel control for winning the strawberry 1 is performed. Furthermore, when the strawberry 1 cannot be won, reel control is performed to draw in the symbols constituting the single winning combination 1 as much as possible.

  As described above, strawberry 1 and strawberry 2 have the highest probability of winning simultaneously with bonuses in the small role group, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 role 1 is the highest, then strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 and strawberry 1 in that order. The number of judgment values is set so that When the strawberry 1 or strawberry 2 is won, the reel control shown in FIG. 10 is performed. For this reason, the more the symbol of “strawberry” appears on the winning line, the more expectation that the bonus is won can be improved, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Next, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ). In the BET process, every time a bet number is set, a BET command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag set in the RAM 41c according to the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Further, in the lottery process, when any one of BB1 to BB5 is won, a process for controlling to the internal RT (for example, setting the value of the internal RT flag as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor 32L is set on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. , 32C, 32R are driven, and rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started. As a result, all the left, middle and right reels 2L, 2C and 2R are updated. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. As a result, the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch operated by the player is stopped and the reel corresponding to the reel motor is stopped from rotating. In the reel rotation process, a reel rotation command for notifying the start of reel rotation is transmitted to the effect control board 90 when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, and rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Each time, a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel is transmitted to the effect control board 90 to determine which reel has been stopped.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process for determining whether or not any of the symbols shown in FIG. 5A is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. Is done. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. In the winning determination process, after the winning determination is made, a winning determination command capable of specifying the presence / absence of the winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of BB1 to BB5 has been won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) Is done.

  Also, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that the player has won the fall replay when it is RT1 or RT2, the process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, the value of the normal gaming state is set to the value of the gaming state flag). Etc.) are performed. Also, when it is determined that the promotion replay has been won during RT1, processing for controlling to RT2 (for example, setting the value of RT2 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, when it is determined that no winning has occurred in the preparation mode or RT2, and the special outcome is stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L4, the control is performed to RT1. Processing (for example, setting the value of RT1 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. Also, in the payout process, when the payout of medals is started by payout of winnings or credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets), a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals is sent to the effect control board 90. When the medal payout by winning and winning the credit is completed, a payout end command for notifying the end of the medal payout is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Also, in the payout process, as various processes not related to winning, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus, 32 games are consumed in the normal gaming state. Thus, a normal game state end determination process is performed to determine whether or not the normal game state end condition is satisfied.

  In the bonus end determination process, when it is determined that the bonus end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to the preparation mode (for example, setting the value of the preparation mode flag to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the normal game state end determination process, when it is determined that the normal game state end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to RT1 (for example, setting the value of the RT1 flag to the value of the game state flag) is performed. It is.

  Also, in the payout process, a game state in which the game state of the next game (normal game state, preparation mode, RT1, RT2, bonus, etc.) can be specified The command is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In the payout process, a winning flag that does not carry over (a winning flag for a small combination or replaying combination) is also deleted, and a winning flag for a bonus stored in a special work is not deleted. As a result, the bonus winning flag is carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 shifts the game state among the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, normal game state, internal RT, and bonus. A command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 according to the progress status. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various game effects are performed by displaying images on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sounds from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in a predetermined ROM.

  In order to perform a game effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, areas for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. The area for storing the winning status, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the gaming state applied in the game running on the gaming control board 40 side (The winning situation and the game state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 91c.

  Further, in the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific winning situation is reached during RT, the sub-control unit 91 performs a navigation effect execution process for executing a navigation effect informing the information corresponding to the winning situation. Done. By performing the navigation effect execution process, depending on the effect state during RT, for example, when a fall replay and other replays are won at the same time (such as at the time of left-press rep win), or grapes 1-8 When a specific winning situation occurs, such as when a banana grape is simultaneously won (such as when a left-pressed grape is won), a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the winning situation is executed.

  The navigation effects in the present embodiment include at least a complete navigation effect, a midway navigation effect, and a partial navigation effect.

  The complete navigation effect is an advantageous operation procedure (first operation) for deriving a symbol combination (for example, promoted replay / normal replay, grapes 1 to 8) that is advantageous to the player according to the winning situation at the start of the game. This is a navigation effect that informs the user of an advantageous operation procedure.

  The midway navigation effect is when the grapes 1 to 8 and banana grapes are won (that is, when the left-pressed grape 1 or the like is won), and the complete navigation effect is not executed and is stopped first. “Banana” is stopped on the winning line, and is executed in the middle of the game when none of the grapes 1 to 8 can be awarded. In the midway navigation effect, an advantageous operation procedure (also referred to as a second advantageous operation procedure) for deriving a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player (for example, banana grapes to be won simultaneously with grapes 1 to 8) can be specified. Is done.

  The partial navigation effect refers to a navigation effect that narrows down the operation procedure by notifying that the operation procedure other than the advantageous operation procedure can be specified in order to increase the possibility that the player operates with the advantageous operation procedure.

  Here, an example of a navigation effect will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a navigation effect. In FIG. 11, in the configuration of the slot machine 1, the reels 2 </ b> L to 2 </ b> R that can be viewed from the see-through window 3 and the display area 51 a of the liquid crystal display 51 are formed above the see-through window 3 and execute a navigation effect. The navigation effect area 58 is shown.

  The navigation effect in the present embodiment is performed by displaying predetermined information in the navigation effect area 58 as shown in FIG. In the navigation effect area 58, reel information frames 58L, 58C, and 58R for displaying predetermined information are displayed corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. In the navigation effect, information for specifying the advantageous operation procedure and information for narrowing down the operation procedure by displaying the operation procedure other than the advantageous operation procedure in an identifiable manner are displayed on each of the reel information frames 58L, 58C, and 58R. Is done.

  FIG. 11 illustrates an example in which, when the winning situation is winning the left-pressed grape 1, when a complete navigation effect is executed, a midway navigation effect is executed, or a partial navigation effect is executed. To do.

  FIGS. 11A1 to 11A2 are diagrams for explaining an example of a complete navigation effect. When the left pressed grape 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 9, the left reel 2L is stopped first, so that the grape 1 is surely irrespective of the operation procedure of the second stop and the third stop. Any of -8 can be awarded. Therefore, the first advantageous operation procedure is a procedure for first stopping the left reel 2L.

  Therefore, in FIG. 11A1, the reel information frame 58L is set to “1” so as to recall that the left reel 2L is first stopped when the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and the game is started. Is displayed, “·” is displayed in each of the reel information frames 58C and 58R, and a complete navigation effect is performed. Thereby, the player can recognize that the left reel 2L should be stopped for the first time, and can reliably win any of the grapes 1 to 8 as long as the operation is not mistaken. In FIG. 11 (a 2), the left reel 2 </ b> L is first stopped as in the complete navigation effect, and a message “correct” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58. When the operation procedure is not performed as in the complete navigation effect, “banana” is stopped on the winning line, and a message “failure” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58.

  The first advantageous operation procedure notified by the complete navigation effect is that when any one of the left-pressed grape 2, the middle-pressed grape 1, the middle-pressed grape 2, the right-pressed grape 1, and the right-pressed grape 2 is won, 9 is a procedure for first stopping the first stop reel for winning any one of the grapes 1 to 8. Thereby, when the complete navigation effect is executed, the reel for winning one of the grapes 1 to 8 can be first stopped according to the winning situation of the grape, and any one of the grapes 1 to 8 can be stopped. You can be sure to win.

  The first advantageous operation procedure is that when any one of the left push lip 1, the left push lip 2, the middle push lip 1, the middle push lip 2, the right push lip 1, and the right push lip 2 is selected. This is the procedure for first stopping the first stop reel indicated by 8. Thereby, when the complete navigation effect is executed, the reel for avoiding the falling replay winning can be first stopped according to the winning situation of the falling replay.

  FIGS. 11B1 to 11B4 are diagrams for explaining an example of a midway navigation effect. FIG. 11B1 shows a state where the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and the game is started. In each of the reel information frames 58L, 58C and 58R in the navigation effect area 58, “?” It is displayed. Thereby, the player cannot specify which reel should be stopped for the first time, and cannot stop the first in the procedure of intentionally winning any of the grapes 1 to 8.

  FIG. 11B2 shows a state when the middle reel 2C is first stopped. When the left pressed grape 1 is won and the left reel 2L is not stopped for the first time, as shown in FIG. 9, reel control is performed so that “banana” stops on the winning line. For this reason, the “banana” of the middle reel 2C is stopped at the middle stage.

  In the case where the left pressed grape 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 9, even if the left reel 2L is not stopped for the first time, the banana grapes won simultaneously with the grapes 1 to 8 are won. The banana grape can be won by performing the second stop and the third stop in the operation procedure that is the operation timing for the purpose.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (b2), even when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the second stop and the third stop are set to “black grape” on the winning line for the left reel 2L. The banana grape 9 can be won when the right reel 2R is operated at a timing at which the “white grape” can be stopped on the winning line at a timing when it can be stopped.

  Even when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the second stop and the third stop are at the timing at which “black grapes” can be stopped on the winning line for the left reel 2L. As for 2C, the banana grape 2 can be won when it is operated at a timing at which "black grape" can be stopped on the winning line.

  Therefore, as a second advantageous operation procedure, when the first stopped reel is the middle reel 2C, “black grape” for the left reel 2L and “white grape” for the right reel 2R are placed on the winning line. When the first stopped reel is the right reel 2R, “black grapes” for the left reel 2L, “black grapes” for the middle reel 2C, The second stop and the third stop are performed at the timing of stopping on the winning line.

  Immediately after the first stop, as shown in FIG. 11 (b 3), after performing a special effect by displaying a specific character and displaying a message “Still More!” In the navigation effect area 58. As shown in FIG. 11 (b4), the reel information frame corresponding to the left reel 2L is recalled so as to recall that “black grape” is stopped for the left reel 2L and “white grape” is stopped for the right reel 2R. “Black grapes” is displayed in 58L, “white grapes” is displayed in the reel information frame 58R corresponding to the right reel 2R, and a navigation effect is being performed on the way. Thus, the player can recognize that the left reel 2L should be stopped at the timing to stop “black grapes” and the right reel 2R should be stopped at the timing to stop “white grapes”. As long as the operation is not mistaken, the banana grape 9 can be won.

  The second advantageous operation procedure notified by the midway navigation effect is when any one of the left-pressed grape 2, the middle-pressed grape 1, the middle-pressed grape 2, the right-pressed grape 1, and the right-pressed grape 2 is won. 9 is a procedure for stopping the second stop reel and the third stop reel for the second stop and the third stop in order to win the banana grape. As a result, when a navigation effect is performed on the way, it is possible to intentionally stop the operation procedure at the timing for winning the banana grapes that have the possibility of winning according to the winning situation of the grapes. It is possible to win banana grapes and to avoid special derivation.

  FIGS. 11C1 to 11C2 are diagrams for explaining an example of a partial navigation effect. When the left pressed grape 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 9, the left reel 2L is stopped first, so that the grape 1 is surely irrespective of the operation procedure of the second stop and the third stop. Any of -8 can be awarded. Therefore, the operation procedure other than the advantageous operation procedure is a procedure for preventing the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R from first stopping.

  For this reason, in FIG. 11 (c1), the reel information corresponding to the right reel 2R is recalled so that the first reel 2R is not stopped when the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and the game is started. “X” is displayed in the frame 58R, and “?” Is displayed in each of the reel information frames 58L and 58C. Thereby, the player can recognize at least that the right reel 2R should not be stopped first, and can select two options as to whether the left reel 2L should be stopped first or the middle reel 2C should be stopped first. It can be narrowed down to one. In FIG. 11 (c <b> 2), the left reel 2 </ b> L is stopped for the first time, and a message “correct answer” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58. When a reel other than the left reel 2L is first stopped, a message such as “incorrect answer” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58.

  The operation procedure other than the advantageous operation procedure notified by the partial navigation effect is when any one of the left pressed grape 2, the middle pressed grape 1, the middle pressed grape 2, the right pressed grape 1, and the right pressed grape 2 is won. The procedure is any one of the procedures other than the procedure of first stopping the first stop reel for winning any of the grapes 1 to 8 shown in FIG.

  The operation procedure other than the advantageous operation procedure is that when any one of the left push lip 1, the left push lip 2, the middle push lip 1, the middle push lip 2, the right push lip 1, and the right push lip 2 is selected, This is one of the procedures other than the procedure for first stopping the first stop reel shown in FIG.

  The procedure notified by the partial navigation effect may be a procedure determined by random lottery from among a plurality of procedures, or may be a procedure determined in advance according to the winning situation.

  Note that the mode of the navigation effect is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 11, and may be any mode as long as the player can be distinguished according to the winning situation. In addition, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, but any effect effect LED 52, speaker 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc., as long as it can identify the procedure to be notified according to the type of navigation effect. It may be executed by using.

  In addition, assist time mode (AT mode), chance zone mode (CZ mode), dangerous mode (DZ mode), and normal mode are provided as effects during RT. The production state during RT is determined by the production state lottery executed by the sub-control unit 91 when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. Further, when the control is performed at RT1 by the effect state control process executed by the sub-control unit 91, the determined effect state is controlled. Hereinafter, the production state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect state during RT controlled by the sub-control unit 91.

[About AT mode]
The AT mode refers to an effect state in which a complete navigation effect is always executed when a specific winning situation is reached. The AT mode is controlled over 50 games as a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. The AT mode can be repeatedly controlled every time the number of assigned navigation stocks is consumed, with the number of navigation stocks as the upper limit. As will be described later, the navigation stock is randomly determined and assigned when the AT mode is won in the production state lottery.

  When a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the AT mode, when the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more, the sub-control unit performs a lottery to determine whether to continue to the AT mode following the AT mode, that is, whether to continue or not. 91.

  When it is determined to continue according to the result of the continuous lottery, as shown in FIG. 12A, the navigation stock number is consumed by 1 and the AT mode is continuously controlled. Note that the timing for starting control to the AT mode may be when the next game is started, or after the presentation state is once controlled to the DZ mode, the game won for the fall replay is started. It may be time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to continue, the effect state is controlled to the DZ mode as shown in FIG. When it is determined not to continue the lottery in the continuous lottery, the resumption timing for resuming the control to the AT mode is determined, and when the resumption timing is reached, the AT mode is controlled. The restart timing is, for example, the timing that is once controlled to RT1 after being controlled once in the normal gaming state, the timing that is controlled again to RT1 after being controlled twice in the normal gaming state, the timing when the bonus is won and ended, etc. It may be one of a plurality of timings or a timing determined by lottery.

  When the predetermined period has elapsed in the AT mode and the number of navigation stocks is 0, the effect state is controlled to the DZ mode. For this reason, when it is controlled from the AT mode to the DZ mode, it becomes impossible to specify whether or not the navigation stock remains, so that a sense of expectation that the navigation stock remains and is controlled again in the AT mode. Can be sustained.

[CZ mode, DZ mode, normal mode]
The CZ mode determines whether or not to execute a navigation effect according to a predetermined execution rate when a specific winning situation is reached, and executes a partial navigation effect when it is determined to be executed. It means an effect state in which only the fact that it is one of specific winning situations when it is determined is notified. As described later, the execution ratio is determined from a plurality of types when the CZ mode is determined in the effect state lottery.

  The DZ mode refers to an effect state in which only a notification that only one of the specific winning situations has been obtained is given when the specific winning situation is reached. The normal mode refers to an effect state in which no notification is given due to the winning situation when a specific winning situation is reached.

  Further, in the CZ mode, DZ mode, and normal mode in which no complete navigation effect is executed, a midway navigation effect can be executed. That is, in the middle navigation effect, in the CZ mode, the DZ mode, and the normal mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed, when the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape are won (that is, when the left pressed grape 1 or the like is won) ) And the first stop, “banana” is stopped on the winning line, and it is executed in the middle of the game on the condition that none of the grapes 1 to 8 can be awarded.

  More specifically, in the middle navigation effect, in the CZ mode, the DZ mode, and the normal mode, when the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape are won, the first stop is performed and “banana” is on the winning line. When stopped and no longer able to win any of grapes 1-8, it is determined whether or not to execute according to the pre-determined halfway navigation execution rate according to the mode, and executed when it is determined to execute Then, the second advantageous operation procedure is notified. The midway navigation execution ratio according to the mode in the present embodiment is set to be highest in the CZ mode and lower in the order of the DZ mode and the normal mode. For example, the intermediate navigation execution ratio is set to “50%” in the CZ mode, “30%” in the DZ mode, and “10%” in the normal mode.

  Note that the midway navigation execution ratio according to the mode may be a ratio set according to the amount of points given. The middle navigation execution ratio may be set such that a higher ratio is set, for example, as the total number of granted points described later increases. Even in such a configuration, if the total number of granted points is the same, the navigation execution ratio may be set so that the CZ mode is the highest, and the DZ mode and the normal mode decrease in this order. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), even if it is controlled by RT and is controlled to any one of the normal mode, DZ mode, and CZ mode, a fall replay is awarded. The game is controlled to the AT mode by the effect state control process executed by the sub-control unit 91 when 10 games are consumed as the predetermined number of times. Note that the timing for controlling the AT mode may be when the next game is started, or when the game won in the fall replay is started.

  Here, the advantageous degree of the production state will be examined. During the RT, when the production state is controlled in any of the normal mode, the DZ mode, and the CZ mode, the partial navigation production is executed at a predetermined rate, or the halfway navigation is executed at a middle navigation execution rate according to the mode. An effect is executed or a navigation effect is not executed. For this reason, a fall replay winning cannot be avoided reliably. In addition, when one of the grapes is won, it may not be possible to surely win the grape and it may be lost. On the other hand, when the effect state is controlled in the AT mode during RT, the complete navigation effect is always executed. For this reason, the fall replay winning can be intentionally avoided. In addition, when one of the grapes is won, the grape can be deliberately awarded. Therefore, it can be said that the AT mode is an effect state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal mode, the DZ mode, and the CZ mode.

  In addition, when the CZ mode is determined among the normal mode, the DZ mode, and the CZ mode, a partial navigation effect is executed according to the determined execution ratio, the CZ mode is the highest, and the DZ mode and the normal mode are A midway navigation effect is executed at a midway navigation execution rate set so as to decrease in order. Therefore, compared to the normal mode or the DZ mode, a part of the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate when the fall replay is won, and the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning is narrowed down to two options. Therefore, the possibility of avoiding the fall replay winning is increased accordingly. In addition, when a grape is won, an intermediate navigation effect or partial navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate, and an operation procedure for winning a banana grape is informed, or one of grapes 1 to 8 is awarded Since the operation procedure is narrowed down to two options, the possibility of losing grapes accordingly can be reduced. As a result, it can be said that the CZ mode is an effect state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal mode and the DZ mode.

  Even in the CZ mode, the higher the execution ratio of the partial navigation effect, the higher the possibility of avoiding the fall replay winning, and the possibility of losing grapes or banana grapes can be reduced. As a result, even in the same CZ mode, it can be said that the higher the execution ratio, the higher the degree of advantage for the player.

  In addition, when it is configured such that the midway navigation execution rate is set according to the total number of granted points, the higher the rate at which midway navigation effects are executed, even in the same CZ mode, DZ mode, and normal mode, The possibility of losing grapes or banana grapes can be reduced. As a result, even in the same CZ mode, DZ mode, and normal mode, it can be said that the higher the navigation execution ratio on the way, the higher the degree of advantage for the player.

  In addition, when controlled to RT1, when the normal mode, the DZ mode, or the CZ mode is determined, and when a promotion replay is won before the game is consumed a predetermined number of times, RT1 and In comparison, RT2 is controlled such that the winning probability of falling replay is low.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the production state is controlled to one of the normal mode, the DZ mode, and the CZ mode, and the production state is the CZ mode even when the complete navigation production is not executed. Depending on whether or not there is an execution rate in the CZ mode and whether or not the winning probability of falling replay is controlled to RT2, it is possible to change the degree of winning the falling replay while the game is played a predetermined number of times.

As described above, RT1 and RT2 fall probability (RT1 fall probability: about 1/5, RT2 fall probability: about 1/30) when in a mode other than AT mode (normal mode, DZ mode), RT1 The probability that 10 games can be digested without winning a tumble replay is (1-1 / 5) ¹⁰ ≈10%, and the probability that 10 games can be digested without falling replay when RT2 is (1 −1/30) ¹⁰ ≈70%. As a result, when the mode is other than the AT mode, the possibility that the game is digested a predetermined number of times and controlled to the AT mode depending on whether it is RT2 or not can be greatly varied, and a sharpness can be added.

  In addition, the winning probability of the fall replay in RT1 and RT2 is not limited to the probability shown in FIG. 7, and the possibility that the game is digested a predetermined number of times and controlled in the AT mode can be varied depending on whether it is RT2. What is set in the probability is sufficient.

  For example, the winning probability of the fall replay in RT1 and RT2 is such that the possibility that the game is digested a predetermined number of times and controlled to the AT mode is, for example, twice or more higher in RT2 than in RT1. May be set. When the mode is other than the AT mode, the greater the possibility of being controlled to the AT mode by digesting the game a predetermined number of times depending on whether or not it is RT2, the greater the sharpness between RT1 and RT2. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  Further, the winning probability of the fall replay may be set so that the winning probability per game of the fall replay is 50% or more at RT1 and less than 50% at RT2. .

  Further, the winning probability per game of the fall replay may be set to be 50% or more at RT1, and may be set to be less than 50% at RT2. That is, in RT2, the winning probability of falling replay calculated from the winning probability of falling replay and the pull-in rate at which the falling replay is drawn on the winning line by reel control at the time of falling replay winning is 50% or more in RT1. The winning probability of falling replay and the pull-in rate of falling replay may be set so as to be less than 50%.

  In addition, the number of games of the predetermined number of times is set so that the falling probability of falling into the normal gaming state by winning the falling replay while the game is consumed the predetermined number of times is less than 50% at RT2 and less than 50% at RT2. A winning probability of falling replay may be set.

  Also, in this embodiment, after the game has been digested a predetermined number of times in RT, the mode is controlled to AT mode, avoiding falling replays, and when not controlled by RT2, promoted replay is awarded and controlled to RT2. . Even if it is RT2 and when it is controlled to the AT mode, the predetermined period elapses and the AT mode ends and the DZ mode is controlled. RT2 with a low winning probability is maintained. For this reason, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player is again controlled to the AT mode without winning a fall replay while the game is played a predetermined number of times.

  In the present embodiment, even when it is controlled to RT and the production state is controlled to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. The example in which the AT mode is controlled by the effect state control process executed by the sub-control unit 91 when 10 games are consumed as the predetermined number of times has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is controlled by RT and the production state is the normal mode, even when 10 games are consumed as a predetermined number of times without causing a fall replay, the AT mode is not controlled. You may comprise. In this case, it can be said that the DZ mode is a production state that is more advantageous for the player in that the DZ mode is controlled to the AT mode when 10 games are consumed as a predetermined number of times than the normal mode.

  In the performance state lottery, the higher the amount of points, the higher the degree of advantage for the player is determined in proportion to the amount of points given as the game progresses. In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, during the RT, the effect state determined by the effect state lottery is controlled, and the navigation effect described above is executed according to the effect state.

  Here, the processing executed by the sub-control unit 91 in relation to the points referred to in the effect state lottery will be described. In relation to the points, the sub-control unit 91 performs a probability state control process for controlling the probability state and a point related process for giving and managing the points and informing them.

  FIG. 12B is a diagram for explaining the transition of the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91. By executing the probability state control process by the sub-control unit 91, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), it is controlled to the high probability state on the condition that the bonus is ended or the winning is performed in a predetermined high probability state lottery. In the high probability state, the low probability state is controlled on condition that a predetermined low probability state lottery is won or a bonus is won. The predetermined high probability state lottery and the predetermined low probability state lottery are executed, for example, when a melon is won, and a lottery is performed using a random number or the like to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). But you can.

  In addition, by executing the probability state control process by the sub-control unit 91, when the BB is won in the high probability state, it is controlled to the low probability state, and after the BB is finished, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state. Controlled. The high-probability state controlled by the end of BB is continuously controlled until 50 games are consumed or a bonus is won.

  Next, the point related process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining the point related processing executed by the sub-control unit 91.

  First, in S1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined point grant condition is satisfied. FIG. 14A is a diagram for explaining a point granting condition that can be established when the probability state is other than the bonus and the probability state is a high probability state, and FIG. 14B is a point that can be established during the bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating provision conditions.

  First, referring to FIG. 14A, when the player is in a high probability state other than the bonus, at least one of melon, strawberry 1 and strawberry 2 is won, or strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 is won. It is established on the condition. More specifically, when a prize other than the bonus is high and at least one of melon, strawberry 1 and strawberry 2 is won, the winner is won by a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter, for example. On the condition that this is done, the point granting condition is satisfied. For example, the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 25% when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and is set to 50% when the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state. In other words, even when at least one of melon, strawberry 1 and strawberry 2 is won in the high probability state, the game state other than the normal game state is more than the normal game state. The point granting condition is established at a high rate. Therefore, it can be said that the player is more advantageous when the player is in the preparation mode or RT, for example, than in the normal gaming state, in that the point granting condition is easily established.

  In addition, points that are awarded when a point granting condition is established by winning at least one of melon, strawberry 1, and strawberry 2 when not in a bonus and in a high probability state, as will be described later. May be notified according to the result of the notification lottery.

  In addition, if the player is in a high probability state other than the bonus and wins the strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 winning combination 1, the point granting condition is always satisfied. For this reason, in the case of a high probability state other than the bonus, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points to be awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning the strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 as described later It will be notified that the points have been awarded.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14 (b), during the bonus, it is established on the condition that one of the small combinations wins alone or that one winning combination 2 is won. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the bonus that can be won by the small combination alone and the bonus that can be won by the single combination 2 is only during RB1.

  When any small combination is won by itself during RB1, for example, a point granting condition is established on the condition that the winning is performed by a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 50%, for example.

  Note that, as will be described later, points that are awarded when any of the small roles are elected alone during RB1 and the point granting condition is satisfied can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, the point granting condition is always satisfied when one winning combination 2 is won during RB1. As described later, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points has been given to the points awarded when the point granting condition is satisfied by winning one player 2 during RB1. Is done.

  In addition, when the point granting condition is always satisfied by winning, it is not limited to notifying that a predetermined number of points have been granted, but accurately notifying the granted points determined in S2, which will be described later. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 13, if it is not determined in S <b> 1 that the point granting condition corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 14 is satisfied, the point related processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1 that the point granting condition is satisfied, in S2, a grant point that can be given to the player is set.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a table for determining grant points in S2. When the point granting condition is established when it is not a bonus, as shown in the non-bonus column of FIG. 15, the point to be given is determined as 1 point at a rate of 50%, and 2 points at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 20% and 5 points at a rate of 10%.

  When the point granting condition is established while the bonus is in effect, as shown in the bonus column of FIG. 15, the point is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 85%, and 2 points at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 4% and 5 points at a rate of 1%.

  In this way, more points are determined as the granted points at a higher rate when the point granting condition is established during the bonus than when the point granting condition is established during the bonus.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to the game state when point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, it may be configured such that the awarded points are determined with reference to a table corresponding to the gaming state when the point granting conditions are established. Thereby, the expectation with respect to more points being awarded can be made different depending on the gaming state when the point granting condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to the kind of winning combination used as the opportunity that point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, the points to be awarded may be determined with reference to a table corresponding to the type of winning combination that triggered the point grant condition. Thereby, the expectation that more points will be awarded can be made different depending on the type of winning combination that triggers the point granting condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In S2 of FIG. 13, a grant point is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. 15, and grant point information for specifying the determined grant point is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies a grant point resulting from the establishment of the current point grant condition based on the grant point information in the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which it is determined whether or not the point granting condition is satisfied in S1, and the granted point is determined in S2 when the condition is satisfied. With regard to the determination of the points and the grant points, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that whether or not the points are awarded in one lottery and the grant points are determined. For example, it may be configured to determine any of points 0 to 5 when the player is in a high probability state other than the bonus and wins a melon in the normal gaming state. In this case, when the point is determined to be 0, no point is given.

  In S3, it is determined whether or not the current point grant condition that triggered the point grant is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted. That is, when the point granting conditions this time are other than the bonus shown in FIG. 14A and are in a high probability state, the condition established by winning strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 or FIG. 14B It is determined whether any of the conditions established by winning the single winning combination 2 during the bonus shown.

  In S3, when it is determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that a predetermined number of points have been granted. . In the present embodiment, for example, the point “1” is determined as the notification point.

  On the other hand, in S3, when it is not determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the determination and notification of whether or not to notify that points have been granted The process proceeds to S4 in order to make a notice lottery for determining the number of points.

  In S4, a difference number notification lottery is performed. In the difference number corresponding notification lottery, according to the difference between the total number of points actually given and the total number of notified points, the granted points set in S2 are notified when the current point grant condition is established. A lottery of whether or not to accurately notify the grant points set in S2, and a lottery of how many points are to be notified if the grant points set in S2 are not accurately reported Including. In S4, the difference number is calculated from the total number of granted points (updated in S10) and the total number of notification points (updated in S9), which will be described later. Specifically, the difference number is a value obtained by subtracting the total number of notification points from the total number of granted points.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the difference number notification lottery. In the difference number correspondence notifying lottery in the present embodiment, first, referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 16A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are to be notified according to the difference number.

  When the difference number is “0”, it is determined to notify at 30% of the fact that the points have been granted in accordance with the setting of the granted points at S2, and not to notify at the rate of 70%. The When the difference number is “1”, it is determined to notify that a point has been granted in S2 at the rate of 40%, and not to be notified at a rate of 60%. The

  When the difference number is “2”, it is determined to notify the fact that the points have been provided in S2 at the rate of 50% and not to be notified at the rate of 50%. The When the difference number is “3 or more”, it is determined to notify 70% of the fact that the points have been provided in accordance with the setting of the granted points in S2, and not to notify at the rate of 30%. Is done.

  In this way, the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 16A is determined not to notify the fact that the points have been given at a higher rate as the difference number is smaller, and at a higher rate as the difference number is larger. To be decided. Thereby, when the difference number is already large, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large by not being further notified.

  When it is decided to notify by referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 16A, the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 16B. Depending on the difference, a lottery for determining whether or not to report the given point accurately and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given point is not reported correctly are performed. If the notification is not made accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous for the player in the production state lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the difference number. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 30%, and point “2” at a rate of 70%. Determined. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 20%, and point “2” at a rate of 80%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “3” and the difference is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10%, and the point “2” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 3 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “2” at a rate of 10%, and point “3” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “2” at a rate of 10%, and the point “3” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 5 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be “3” at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  In this way, in the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 16B, the point to be notified is determined so that the fact that the smaller the difference number is, the lower the number of points given than the granted points is notified. The point to be notified is determined so that the higher the difference number is, the higher the proportion is given, or the fact that a point closer to the given point is given. In addition, the more points are given, the higher the rate is. As a result, when the difference number is already large, or when a large number of given points are likely to cause the difference number, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large due to the notification of even fewer points.

  In the difference number corresponding notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify using the table of FIGS. 16A and 16B and the notification point has been described. Only the table of 16 (a) may be used to determine only whether or not to notify according to the difference number, and when it is determined to notify, it may be configured to accurately notify the grant points set in S2. . Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to a difference number using only the table of FIG.16 (b).

  Returning to FIG. 13, in S <b> 5, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been given by the difference number corresponding notification lottery of S <b> 4. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S4 has been given. On the other hand, when it is not determined to notify in S5, the process proceeds to S6.

  In S6, a total number notification lottery is performed. The total number corresponding notice lottery refers to the granted points set in S2 when the present point grant condition is satisfied according to the total number of granted points (the total number of normal granted points other than the bonus, the total number of bonus granted points during the bonus). A lottery for determining whether or not to be notified, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately notify the grant points set in S2, and how many points are to be notified when the grant points set in S2 are not accurately reported Includes lottery. If not notified accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player than the actual awarded points in an effect state lottery to be described later, that is, points that are less than the granted points. Note that the total number of points actually assigned is specified from the total number of granted points described later.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the total number notification lottery. In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the present embodiment, first, with reference to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 17A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are notified according to the total number of points actually assigned. It is.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “0 to 1”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that the points have been given at a rate of 80% and not to notify at a rate of 20%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “3-5”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “2-3”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 50% and not to notify at a rate of 50%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “4 to 5”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 10% and not to notify at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 17A is determined to notify the fact that points have been granted at a higher rate as the total number of given points is smaller. The larger the number, the higher the ratio is determined not to be notified. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, the player can be relieved to recognize that a small number of points are given by notifying at a high rate. On the other hand, by not being notified at a high rate when a large number of points are given, it is possible to increase the possibility that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. , Can maintain a sense of expectation.

  If it is decided to notify by referring to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 17A, further refer to the total number correspondence table B in FIG. Depending on the total number of points granted, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately report the given points and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given points are not reported correctly are performed. It is.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the total number of given points. When the number of points given is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 90%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 10%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 10%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 20%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “3” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” is determined at a rate of 90%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, 10% of the points are determined as “1”, 10% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, 50% of the points are determined as “5” It is determined.

  When the number of points awarded is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, , 30% of the points are determined as “1”, 30% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, and 10% of the points are determined as “5”. It is determined.

  In this way, the total number correspondence table B in FIG. 17 (b) is assigned so that the smaller the total number of granted points, the higher the percentage that is given to the granted points or points closer to the given points. The point to be notified is determined so that the fact that a smaller number of points than the granted points are given at a higher rate is notified as the total number of the given points is larger. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, it is possible to reassure the player by recognizing that a small number of points are given by accurately informing at a high rate. On the other hand, when a large number of points are given, a point that is less than the given points is notified at a high rate, so that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. Can increase the possibility of being in the future, and can sustain expectations.

  In the total lot notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify using the tables of FIGS. 17A and 17B and the notification point has been described. It may be configured to determine only whether or not to notify in accordance with the total number using only the table of (a), and to accurately notify the granted point set in S2 when it is determined to notify. Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to the total number using only the table of FIG.17 (b).

  Moreover, although the example which performs the difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery and the total number corresponding | compatible notification lottery was demonstrated as the notification lottery in this Embodiment, you may comprise not only this but only any one. Further, the example of performing the total number corresponding notification lottery after performing the difference number corresponding notification lottery has been described, but the difference number corresponding notification lottery may be performed after performing the total number corresponding notification lottery.

  In the notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify and the notification point according to the difference number and the total number has been described. However, the notification lottery is not limited thereto, and the difference number and the total number are determined. Regardless, it may be configured to determine whether or not to notify and the notification point according to the grant point set in S2.

  Returning to FIG. 13, in S <b> 7, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been awarded by the total number corresponding notification lottery of S <b> 6. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S6 has been given. On the other hand, if it is not determined to notify in S7, the process proceeds to S10 without performing the process for notifying that the points have been granted.

  In S8, the notification process for performing the point provision effect which alert | reports that the point was provided is performed. In the notification process, when it is determined YES in S3, for example, information that can specify that point “1” has been granted is notified as a point grant effect (at the start or end of the game, “Acquire Point 1! To display a message such as “!”. Also, in the notification process, information that can specify that the point determined in S4 or S6 is given as a point granting effect is notified (for example, when notifying that the point “2” has been given) Then, at the start or end of the game, a process for displaying a message such as “Acquire Point 2!” Is performed.

  Note that the point granting effect is not limited to that executed in the above-described manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as the effect is executed in an aspect corresponding to the number of points given. .

  In S9, the notification point total number information for specifying the total number of notification points, which is the total number of points notified to the player by the process of S8, is updated. Note that as the point granting effect notified in S8, information for specifying the total number of notification points (for example, a message such as “total number of acquired points 5!”) May be notified.

  The notification point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for each point every time it is notified in S8 that a point has been given. Note that the notification point total number information is reset by winning a bonus or by determining to control the effect state to the AT mode.

  In S10, the total granted point information for specifying the total number of granted points, which is the total number of points actually given by the process of S2, is updated. The granted point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for the given points after the given points are set in S2 and a notification lottery is performed.

  The total number of granted points in the present embodiment is reset when a bonus is won and an effect state lottery is performed, or when it is determined to control the effect state to the AT mode. The information on the total number of granted points is not limited to the fact that the bonus was won and the production state lottery was performed, or the fact that the decision was made to control the production state to the AT mode. A predetermined number of points (for example, 2 points) out of the total number of granted points may be carried over even after the lottery is performed or after it is decided to control the production state to the AT mode.

  In the present embodiment, as the upper limit of the total number of granted points, “10” is set in advance except during the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, when the granted points set in S2 are added to the total number of granted points until the current point grant condition is satisfied, the upper limit is set as the total number of granted points when the above-described upper limit is exceeded. Accordingly, as the upper limit of the total number of notification points, “10” is set in advance except for the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, in S8, when the point determined by the notification lottery or the like is notified, it is notified from the relationship with the total number of notification points that if the above-described upper limit value is exceeded, the point that becomes the upper limit value is given. The

  When the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, notification is not performed in the same manner as when no points are given. Therefore, after the granted points are set in S2, if the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, the point-related process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to S3 only when the total number of notification points is less than the upper limit value. You may comprise.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the point granting condition is established, whether or not to notify is determined according to the difference number or the total number of points actually assigned, It is determined and notified according to the determination result. In addition, the notification point is determined from the point where the degree of advantage is lower for the player in the performance state lottery than the actually granted point. For this reason, the points recognized by the player from the notification points are equal to or less than the total number of points actually given. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the total number of points actually granted may be greater than the total number of points specified from the notification points, and the total number of points specified from the notification points. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater expectation to the player to be determined to be in an advantageous production state in the production state lottery.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 performs an effect state control process in accordance with the total number of points granted as described above. In the production state control process, a production state lottery process for performing the production state lottery when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, a navigation stock number lottery process for drawing the number of navigation stocks for specifying the period to be controlled in the AT mode, An execution rate lottery process for drawing the execution rate at which some navigation effects are executed in the CZ mode, and a continuous lottery process for lottering whether to continue control in the AT mode (these lotteries are referred to as (Also called various lotteries).

  In the effect state lottery process, one effect state is selected from a plurality of effect states according to the winning rate according to the total number of granted points, using the table corresponding to the established lottery condition among the tables shown in FIGS. Is determined by lottery.

  The predetermined lottery condition is satisfied when a bonus is won, when a specific combination is won during the bonus, or when a specific combination is won during a gaming state other than the bonus. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, the effect state lottery will be described in detail.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for effect state lottery when a bonus is won. Note that the effect state determined in the effect state lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18 is an effect state when the winning bonus is finished and RT1 is started to shift from the preparation mode.

  FIG. 18A is a lottery table used when winning a bonus alone, bonus + melon, bonus + strawberry 1, bonus +1 sheet combination 1 or not. Note that the bonus alone shown in FIG. 18 (a) indicates that the bonus is not won simultaneously with the small role, and includes the concept including the case where the bonus is simultaneously won with the replay.

  When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 94%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 1%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 2%, and AT is set at a rate of 3%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of awarded points is 3-5, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 92%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 1%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 2%, and the AT is determined at a rate of 5%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 6-9, the normal mode is decided at 83%, the DZ mode is decided at 2%, the CZ mode is decided at 5%, and the AT is decided at 10%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, the normal mode is decided at 70%, the DZ mode is decided at 5%, the CZ mode is decided at 10%, and the AT mode is decided at 15%. Is done.

  FIG. 18B is a lottery table used when winning of bonus + strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 is won.

  When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 70%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 5%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 10%, and the AT is determined at a rate of 15%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 3-5, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 55%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 10%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 15%, and the AT is determined at a rate of 20%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 6-9, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 50%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 10%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 15%, and the AT is determined at a rate of 25%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 40%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 10%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 20%, and the AT mode is set at a rate of 30%. It is determined.

  FIG. 18C is a lottery table used when winning of bonus + strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 is won.

  When the total number of granted points is 0-2, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 55%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 10%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 15%, and the AT is determined at a rate of 20%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 3 to 5, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 30%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 15%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 25%, and the AT is determined at a rate of 30%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 6-9, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 10%, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 20%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 30%, and the AT is determined at a rate of 40%. The mode is determined.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, the DZ mode is determined at a rate of 20%, the CZ mode is determined at a rate of 30%, the AT mode is determined at a rate of 50%, and the normal mode is not determined.

  As described above, in the effect state lottery when the bonus is won, the winning rate is set so that the effect state is determined to be more advantageous for the player as the total number of granted points is larger. In addition, when the table shown in FIG. 18B is referred to as the lottery table, the stage shown in FIG. 18A is determined to be more advantageous for the player. Thus, it is more advantageous for the player when the winning rate is set and the table shown in FIG. 18B is referred to than when the table shown in FIG. 18B is referenced. The winning rate is set so as to be determined in the production state. 18B and 18C are tables that are referred to in a winning situation where strawberries can be stopped and displayed on the winning line as shown in FIG. For this reason, the more strawberries are arranged on the winning line, the more the player can have a sense of expectation that the stage is determined to be more advantageous for the player.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for a production state lottery when a specific combination is won during the bonus. In the effect state lottery using the table shown in FIG. 19, it is determined to change to the effect state or AT mode which is advantageous for the player by one rank over the effect state already determined at the time of bonus winning or the like. The As shown in FIG. 12 (a), an effect state in which the rank is advantageous corresponds to the DZ mode when the already determined effect state is the normal mode, and corresponds to the CZ mode when the effect state is the DZ mode. The AT mode corresponds to the CZ mode. Note that the effect state determined / updated in the effect state lottery using the table shown in FIG. 19 is an effect state when RT1 is started after the bonus is ended and transition from the preparation mode is started.

  FIG. 19A is a lottery table used when the strawberry 1 is won independently during the bonus.

  When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, it is determined without change at a rate of 94%, is determined to be a stage up one rank at a rate of 3%, and is set to the AT mode at a rate of 3%.

  When the total number of granted points is 3 to 5, it is determined without change at a rate of 92%, it is determined to be a performance state one rank higher at a rate of 3%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the total number of granted points is 6 to 9, it is determined without change at a rate of 83%, is determined to be a stage up one rank at a rate of 7%, and is determined to be AT mode at a rate of 10%.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, it is determined without change at a rate of 70%, it is determined at the 15% rate as a performance state one rank higher, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 15%.

  FIG. 19B is a lottery table used when winning a melon, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 sheet combination 1, 1 sheet combination 1 during the bonus.

  When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, it is determined without change at a rate of 70%, is determined to be a stage higher by 15%, and is set to the AT mode at a rate of 15%.

  When the total number of granted points is 3 to 5, it is determined without change at a rate of 55%, it is determined to be a performance state one rank higher at a rate of 25%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When the total number of granted points is 6 to 9, it is determined without change at a rate of 50%, it is determined at a stage that is one rank higher at a rate of 25%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 25%.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, it is determined that there is no change at a rate of 40%, the performance state is determined to be one rank higher at a rate of 30%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 30%.

  FIG. 19 (c) is a lottery table used when one winning combination 2 is won during the bonus. Regardless of the total number of granted points, the AT mode is determined at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, in the production state lottery when a specific winning combination is won during the bonus (except for the case of two single-component combinations), the production state is determined to be more advantageous for the player as the total number of granted points increases. The winning rate is set for. In addition, when the table shown in FIG. 19B is referred to as the lottery table, the stage shown in FIG. 19B is determined to be more advantageous for the player. Thus, it is more advantageous for the player when the winning rate is set and the table shown in FIG. 19B is referred to than when the table shown in FIG. 19B is referenced. The winning rate is set so as to be determined in the production state. Moreover, in this Embodiment, it draws | lots so that it may not rank down to the production state more disadvantageous than the production state already determined. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may cause anxiety that a lottery disadvantageous to the player may be performed during the bonus.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for a production state lottery when a specific combination is won during a game state other than a bonus. In the effect state lottery using the table shown in FIG. 20, it is determined to change to the effect state or AT mode which is advantageous for the player by one rank over the already determined effect state. Also, the effect state determined and updated in the effect state lottery using the table shown in FIG. 20 is the effect state when RT1 is newly started. That is, when RT, the RT is finished and once controlled to the normal gaming state, and then the RT1 is newly started. When the gaming state is other than RT, the gaming state is This refers to the effect state when RT1 is newly started after the end.

  In addition, when it is during RT, you may make it control immediately to the production state determined in the production state lottery using the table shown in FIG. Immediate control is not limited as long as it is controlled without being controlled by RT1. For example, it may be controlled from the determined game or may be controlled from the next game. Alternatively, it may be controlled when the number of games won is exhausted and the number of games won is exhausted. Thereby, the lottery result that increases the degree of advantage for the player due to the effect state lottery can be immediately reflected, and the degree of advantage for the player can be further increased.

  FIG. 20A is a lottery table used when winning a melon and strawberry 1 alone. Note that the winning rate corresponding to the number of granted points is the same as in FIG.

  FIG. 20B is a lottery table used when winning a combination of strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 and 1 sheet 1. Note that the winning rate corresponding to the number of points awarded is the same as in FIG.

  FIG. 20C is a lottery table used when winning a combination of strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 sheet 1. When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, it is determined without change at a rate of 55%, it is determined at the stage of a rank one rank at a rate of 25%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When the total number of granted points is 3 to 5, it is determined without change at a rate of 30%, it is determined at a stage that is one rank higher at a rate of 40%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 30%.

  When the total number of granted points is 6 to 9, it is determined without change at a rate of 10%, it is determined to be a performance state one rank higher at a rate of 50%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, the performance state is determined to be one rank higher at a rate of 50%, and the AT mode is determined at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, in the production state lottery when a specific winning combination is won during a game state other than the bonus, the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points, the more advantageous the production state for the player. ing. In addition, when the table shown in FIG. 20B is referred to as the lottery table, the stage shown in FIG. 20B is determined to be more advantageous for the player. Thus, it is more advantageous for the player when the winning rate is set and the table shown in FIG. 20C is referred to than when the table shown in FIG. The winning rate is set so as to be determined in the production state. Moreover, in this Embodiment, it draws | lots so that it may not rank down to the production state more disadvantageous than the production state already determined. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may give an uneasy feeling that a lottery disadvantageous to the player may be performed during a gaming state other than the bonus.

  In the effect state lottery explained with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, when the game is digested a predetermined number of times without winning a fall replay when the AT mode is determined or when the effect state in RT is other than the AT mode The sub-control unit 91 executes a navigation stock number lottery process for lottering the number of navigation stocks for specifying the period during which the AT mode is controlled.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-times determination table for determining the number of navigation stocks at the time of determining the AT mode. The number of navigation stocks is also determined so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the total number of granted points.

  When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, the navigation stock number is determined to be “1” at a rate of 90%, “3” at a rate of 5%, and “5” at a rate of 2%. Then, it is determined as “10” at a rate of 2%, and is determined as “20” at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of granted points is 3-5, the number of navigation stock is determined to be “1” at a rate of 60%, “3” at a rate of 20%, and “5” at a rate of 15%. 3% is determined to be “10”, and 2% is determined to be “20”.

  When the total number of granted points is 6-9, the number of navigation stock is determined to be “1” at a rate of 42%, “3” at a rate of 30%, and “5” at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be “10” at a rate of 5% and “20” at a rate of 3%.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, the number of navigation stock is determined to be “3” at a rate of 40%, “5” at a rate of 30%, and “10” at a rate of 15%, It is determined to be “20” at a rate of 15%, and not determined to “1”.

  As described above, in the navigation stock number lottery, the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points, the more advantageous the number of times for the player (the larger number of times) is determined. Further, when the total number of granted points is 10, the number of navigation stock is always determined to be “3” or more.

  In addition, when it is already determined to control to AT mode or when it is controlled to AT mode, and when it is further determined to AT mode in the production state lottery, the navigation stock number lottery is caused due to the determination. Then, the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the lottery result is added to the number of navigation stocks already determined in AT mode, that is, the number of navigation stocks is added.

  In the effect state lottery described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, when the CZ mode is determined, the sub-control unit 91 executes an execution rate lottery process for drawing an execution rate at which a partial navigation effect is executed. Is done.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining an execution ratio determination table for determining an execution ratio for executing a partial navigation effect at the time of determining the CZ mode. The execution ratio is also determined so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the total number of granted points.

  When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, “execution rate: 10%” is determined at a rate of 10%, “execution rate: 50%” is determined at a rate of 20%, and “execution rate is set at a rate of 30%. The ratio is determined to be “80%”, and the ratio of 40% is determined to be “execution ratio: 100%”.

  When the total number of granted points is 3 to 5, the execution rate is determined to be “execution rate: 10%” at a rate of 5%, “execution rate: 50%” at a rate of 15%, and 20% The ratio is determined to be “execution ratio: 80%”, and the ratio of 60% is determined to be “execution ratio: 100%”.

  When the total number of granted points is 6 to 9, the execution rate is determined to be “execution rate: 10%” at a rate of 5%, and “execution rate: 50%” is determined at a rate of 5%. The ratio is determined as “execution ratio: 80%”, and the ratio is determined as “execution ratio: 100%” at a ratio of 80%.

  When the total number of granted points is 10, the execution rate is determined as “execution rate: 100%” at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, in the execution ratio lottery, the winning ratio is set so that the execution ratio is determined to be more advantageous for the player as the total number of granted points increases. When the total number of granted points is 10, the execution rate is determined as “100%”.

  When 50 games have been consumed in the AT mode and the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more, continue to draw lots of whether or not to continue to control the AT mode by consuming 1 navigation stock A lottery process is executed by the sub-control unit 91.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a continuation determination table for determining whether or not to continue the AT mode in the continuous lottery. Also in the continuous lottery, the degree of advantage for the player is determined according to the total number of granted points.

  When the total number of granted points is 0 to 2, “continuation success” is determined at a rate of 60%, and “continuation failure” is determined at a rate of 40%. When the “continuation success” is determined, the AT mode is continued. When the “continuation failure” is determined, the AT mode is terminated and the control is changed to the DZ mode, and then the predetermined mode is reached without falling from the RT to the normal gaming state. The AT mode is resumed when the game is completed several times or when the timing for resuming the AT mode is reached.

  When the total number of granted points is 3 to 5, “continuation success” is determined at a rate of 75%, and “continuation failure” is determined at a rate of 25%.

  When the total number of granted points is 6 to 9, “continuation success” is determined at a rate of 90%, and “continuation failure” is determined at a rate of 10%. When the total number of granted points is 10, “continuation success” is determined at a rate of 100%, and “continuation failure” does not occur.

  As described above, in the continuous lottery, the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points, the more “continuous success” is determined. Further, when the total number of granted points is 10, “continuation success” is determined at a rate of 100%, and “continuation failure” does not occur.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs a gaming state effect execution process, thereby displaying a gaming state effect related to the current gaming state or the rendering state as a liquid crystal display 51, a rendering effect LED 52, a speaker 53, 54, and using electrical components such as reel LED 55.

  As the game state effect, for example, in the normal game state and the preparation mode, a normal effect (for example, a message such as “Normally!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) that can specify that it is non-AT is performed. It is. In addition, the above-described normal performance is also performed when RT1, RT2 and internal RT are in the normal mode. For this reason, in the normal mode, a common gaming state effect is executed in the gaming state other than the bonus. As a result, it is difficult to specify which gaming state is controlled from the gaming state effect.

  Further, when it is RT and the effect state is the DZ mode, the effect for DZ is performed. Further, when it is RT and the effect state is the CZ mode, the effect for CZ is performed.

  A plurality of types of effects are provided as effects for CZ. When the CZ mode is determined in the effect state lottery, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects according to the execution ratio determined in the same manner. In selecting the production, for example, production A is selected at a high rate for “execution rate: 10%”, and production B is selected at a high rate for “execution rate: 50%”. For “execution rate: 80%”, production C is selected at a high rate, and for “execution rate: 100%”, production D is selected at a high rate. Thereby, the execution ratio determined from the type of effect for CZ can be predicted, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when the effect A is executed as the CZ effect, it can be predicted from the effect that the execution ratio may be “10%”.

  Further, when it is RT and the production state is the AT mode, the production for AT is performed. Even if it is determined that the AT mode is selected in the production state lottery, one production may be selected from a plurality of types of production according to the number of navigation stocks to be determined or the number of navigation stocks added. Good. As a result, the total number of navigation stocks can be predicted from the types of effects for AT, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, main effects obtained by the first embodiment described above will be described.
(1) In the first embodiment described above, when the complete navigation effect is executed, any of the grapes 1 to 8 is intentionally selected when the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape (such as a left-pressed grape) are selected. Can be operated in accordance with the first advantageous operation procedure for winning a prize, and when a fall replay and other replays (left-pressed lip, etc.) are won, It can be operated by an operation procedure for winning a replay. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the complete navigation effect is executed and the AT mode in which the complete navigation effect is executed is controlled.

  In addition, regarding the games won for the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grapes (left-pressed grapes, etc.), when the complete navigation effect is not executed, the game cannot be operated in the first advantageous operation procedure “banana”. Even when the player stops on the winning line, the second stop and the third stop after the first stop are operated according to the second advantageous operation procedure shown in FIG. Can be avoided and the derivation of special outcomes can be avoided. The second advantageous operation procedure is notified by an intermediate navigation effect. For this reason, even when the complete navigation effect is not executed, that is, when the mode is not the AT mode and the operation cannot be performed in the first advantageous operation procedure and “banana” stops on the winning line, the second stop thereafter Further, it can be expected that the third stop is operated by the second advantageous operation procedure, and that the navigation effect is performed on the way. As a result, in the game where the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape are won, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning one of them, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (2) In the first embodiment described above, in the game won for grapes 1 to 8 and banana grapes (left pressed grapes and the like), the complete navigation effect is not executed, and the first stop is the first advantageous operation procedure. When the navigation effect is executed on the way when the operation is not performed, the special effect shown in FIG. 11 (b3) is executed immediately after the first stop. For this reason, the special effect gives the player the impression that the second advantageous operation procedure will be informed afterward and the second advantageous operation procedure will be notified, and the pleasure of notifying the second advantageous operation procedure. Can be prevented as much as possible before the middle navigation effect is executed or before the second stop is performed without noticing the middle navigation effect.

  (3) In the first embodiment described above, a complete navigation effect is executed at RT2, which is more advantageous to the player than other gaming states in that the winning probability of normal replay is high and the winning probability of falling replay is low. Even when the first stop is not operated by the first advantageous operation procedure, the second stop and the third stop are operated by the second advantageous operation procedure, so that the special It is possible to avoid that the outcome is derived and controlled by RT1. For this reason, even if it is a mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed and “banana” is stopped on the winning line as a result of the first stop being not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, the intermediate navigation effect is not performed. By being executed and operated according to the second advantageous operation procedure, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for continuing RT2 without ending.

  (4) In the first embodiment described above, when 10 games are consumed as a predetermined number of times without deriving a fall replay when the AT mode is not controlled during RT, the AT mode is controlled. In the AT mode, since the complete navigation effect is executed when the fall replay is won, it is possible to continue the RT by intentionally operating according to the procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning. As a result, when the AT mode is not controlled during RT, the player can have a sense of expectation that 10 games will be consumed for a predetermined number of times without deriving a fall replay.

  In addition, RT1 has a relatively high probability of falling replay and a probability of falling replay than RT1 before 10 games have been digested as a predetermined number of times without deriving a falling replay when the AT mode is not controlled during RT. Can be controlled to RT2, which is low, and can be controlled to CZ mode in which the execution ratio of some navigation effects is different. Therefore, even before 10 games are digested, 10 games can be digested without winning a fall replay, depending on whether it is RT1 or RT2 and the execution ratio of the partial navigation effect in the CZ mode. Since the degree can be changed, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even when controlled to the AT mode, it can be controlled from RT1 to RT2 by promotion replay winning. When controlled in the AT mode and controlled in the RT2, even if the AT mode is terminated by digesting 50 games as a predetermined period, the winning probability of falling replay is controlled continuously in the RT2. Since the low state is maintained compared to when RT1 is RT1, the expectation that RT will be maintained is maintained, and 10 games are consumed and AT mode is controlled again without the fall replay being derived. Can maintain a sense of expectation.

  (5) In the first embodiment described above, RT2 is controlled by winning a promotion replay that can be won simultaneously with a fall replay in RT1. In other words, by avoiding the fall replay winning in RT1, the promotion replay winning can be made and controlled by RT2, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  (6) In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it controls to RT1 by deriving the special appearance when grapes 1-8 are missed in RT2. However, in the AT mode, since the complete navigation effect is executed, it can be operated in a procedure that does not intentionally drop the grapes 1-8, and any one of the grapes 1-8 can be won. At the same time, it can be avoided that a special outcome is derived and controlled by RT1, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, even when the mode is other than the AT mode, any of the banana grapes that are selected at the same time as the grapes 1 to 8 are intentionally selected when the navigation effect is executed while being executed at a predetermined execution rate. It can be operated in a non-missing procedure, can generate banana grape winnings, can avoid the special outcome being derived and controlled by RT1, and improve the fun of the game Can do.

  (7) In the above-described first embodiment, even when the control is performed by RT2, after the AT mode is ended, the navigation effect is not executed by being controlled by the DZ mode. Therefore, even when it is controlled by RT2 and controlled by AT mode, the game can be progressed with a sense of tension against the fall replay winning and being controlled by RT1, improving the interest of the game Can be made. On the other hand, even when controlled to the DZ mode, since the navigation effect is executed on the way according to a predetermined execution rate, when any of the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape is won, Can also be missed, and the possibility of being controlled to RT1 where the special outcome is derived and the winning probability of the fall replay is increased can be reduced.

  (8-1) In the first embodiment described above, the performance state lottery, the navigation stock number lottery, the execution ratio lottery, the continuous lottery, and the like are higher as the number of granted points increases. The lottery is drawn according to the winning rate determined so that the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that more points are awarded.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 13, on the condition that the point granting condition is established and the point is granted, the point granting effect for notifying that the point has been granted in S8 is performed. An informing process is performed. In this notification process, based on the processing results of S3 to S6 in FIG. 13, the point grant effect that accurately notifies the grant point set in S2 of FIG. 13 or the grant point set in S2 of FIG. A point giving effect for informing a small number of points is executed. Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 13, even when the point granting condition is satisfied and the point is given, if it is decided not to be notified in the notice lottery of S4 or S6 in FIG. Is not executed, and no notification is given that points have been awarded. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that more points than the total number of points specified from the executed point giving effect may be actually given.

  As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the total number of points may be more advantageous for the player than the total number of points specified from the point giving effect. In addition, even when the total number of points specified from the point granting effect is relatively small, more points than the total number of points may be actually given, so that a sense of expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 13, a point granting effect is performed for the grant point set in S2 of FIG. 13 on the condition that the point granting condition is satisfied and the point is granted. For this reason, the above-mentioned feeling of expectation can be raised step by step every time the point giving effect is executed. In addition, in order for the player to predict the total number of points given, it is possible to add an interest that the player himself accumulates and stores the points specified from the executed point giving effects.

  (8-2) In the difference number corresponding notification lottery in S4 of the point-related processing, the table shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B is referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately are determined. Is determined with a probability corresponding to the difference between the total number of notification points specified from the already performed point granting effects and the total number of granted points actually given. Further, in the difference number notification lottery, when the difference number is larger than when the difference number is small, it is determined to notify at a higher rate, and at a higher rate, points awarded or points closer to the given point are given. A notification point is determined so as to notify the user of the fact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large and the reliability of the point specified from the point giving effect from becoming too low.

  (8-3) In the total lot notification lottery in S6 of the point-related process, the tables shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately are determined. It is determined with a probability corresponding to the total number of granted points actually given. Furthermore, in the total number corresponding notification lottery, when the total number of granted points is smaller than when the total number of granted points is large, it is decided to report at a high rate, and at a high rate, the points that are closer to the granted point or the given points The notification point is determined so that the fact that it has been granted is notified. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of granted points, the higher the player's attention to whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (9) In the first embodiment described above, when the CZ mode is controlled during RT, a CZ effect selected from a plurality of types is executed according to a ratio corresponding to the execution ratio. For this reason, the execution ratio can be predicted from the type of effect for CZ, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, when the grape and banana grape which are small roles are elected, it is made to win a grape reliably by operating by the 1st advantageous operation procedure, Even when it is not operated, the banana grapes are won by operating in the second advantageous operation procedure, and when not operated in the second advantageous operation procedure, the grapes and the banana grapes are dropped and when RT2. Although the example in which the reel control for deriving the disadvantageous special event controlled by the RT1 is described has been described, such a reel control is not limited to the one applied to grapes and banana grapes, but other small roles It may also be applied to other types of roles, such as replays that are replay players.

  In the second embodiment, an example in which the reel control is applied to replay will be described. Note that, in the second embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment is omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment are mainly described.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for describing the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations in the second embodiment. In FIG. 24, “Replay 1 to 8” of the re-playing role is set as the winning combination of the same symbol combination as “Grape 1 to 8” shown in FIG. 5, and “Banana grapes 1 to 12 shown in FIG. "Banana Replay 1-12" is set as a winning combination of the same symbol combination as "", and "Tumble Replay 1" of the regaming player is awarded as a winning combination of the same symbol combination as shown in FIG. -16 ”is set, and“ banana ”of 9 small payouts is set as a winning combination of the same symbol combination as“ normal replay ”shown in FIG. 5, and“ tumbling replay 1 ”shown in FIG. No. 2 ”and“ control replays 1 and 2 ”are not set with a winning combination of the same symbol combination.

  Also, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, when winning in any of the banana replays 1 to 12 in the preparation mode or RT2, it is controlled to RT1, and when winning any of the falling replays 1 to 16 It is controlled to the normal gaming state. For this reason, in 2nd Embodiment, after the banana replays 1-12 stop in a preparation mode or RT2, it is controlled by RT1. RT1 is continuously controlled until winning a bonus, winning a promotion replay, or winning one of the fall replays 1-16, and after winning one of the fall replays 1-16 at RT1 or RT2. Is controlled to the normal gaming state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the combination of the lottery object combination read as the lottery object combination for each gaming state in the second embodiment will be described.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group Role, BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 single role 1, single single role 1, banana, replay are subject to internal lottery, Read out. Replay means replay 1 + replay 2 + replay 3 + ... + replay 8.

  When the game state is the preparation mode, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group , BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 roll 1, 1 roll 1, banana, replay, banana replay are eligible for internal lottery, and are eligible for internal lottery Are read in order. The banana replay refers to banana replay 1 + banana replay 2 + banana replay 3+. When only the banana replays 1 to 12 are won at the same time as the replay, reel control is performed to win any banana replay from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3 regardless of the operation procedure.

  When the gaming state is RT1, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group, BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, 1 piece 1, banana, replay, promotion replay, left press replay 1, left press replay 2, medium press replay 1, middle push replay 2, right push replay 1, right push replay 2 are targets of internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as targets for internal lottery.

  In the second embodiment, left-press replay 1 refers to replay + banana replay 2 + banana replay 9 + falling replays 7-16. Left-press replay 2 refers to replay + banana replay 5 + banana replay 12 + falling replay 7-16. The intermediate press replay 1 means replay + banana replay 4 + banana replay 8 + falling replays 1-8, 13-16. The intermediate press replay 2 refers to replay + banana replay 7 + banana replay 11 + falling replays 1-8, 13-16. Right-press replay 1 refers to replay + banana replay 1 + banana replay 3 + falling replays 1-12. Right-press replay 2 refers to replay + banana replay 10 + banana replay 6 + falling replays 1-12.

  When the gaming state is RT2, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group, BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, 1 piece 1, banana, replay, left push replay 1, left push replay 2, middle push replay 1, middle push Replay 2, right-press replay 1, and right-press replay 2 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as target roles for internal lottery.

  When the game state is RT in the inside, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group, BB5 + small role group, Melon, Strawberry 1, Strawberry 1 + Strawberry 2, Strawberry 1 + Strawberry 2 + 1 Sheet 1, 1 Sheet 1, Banana, Replay, Left Press Replay 1, Left Press Replay 2, Middle Press Replay 1, Middle Press Replay 2, Right Press Replay 1, The right push replay 2 becomes the target of the internal lottery and is sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery. In the internal RT, even if the BB is read at the same time as the small role group and won, the winning flag of the BB that triggered the control of the internal RT is maintained.

  The target combination read by the internal lottery when the gaming state is RB1 and RB2 is the same as in the first embodiment.

  Next, reel control when a plurality of types of replays are won simultaneously will be described. When multiple types of replays are won simultaneously, when only replays (replays 1 to 8) are won and when only banana replays (banana replays 1 to 12) are won, “ As in the case of winning only “Grape”, regardless of the type of reel that has been first stopped and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, one of the grapes 1 to 8, or the banana replay 1 to Reel control is performed so that any one of 12 will always win.

  On the other hand, when one of the left push replay 1, the left push replay 2, the middle push replay 1, the middle push replay 2, the right push replay 1, and the right push replay 2 is won, the left, middle in FIG. The reel control is performed in the same manner as when either the right-pressed grape 1 or 2 is won. Reel control is performed in which “Grape” in FIG. 9 is replaced with “Replay”, “Banana Grape” in FIG. 9 is replaced with “Banana Replay”, and “Special Feature” in FIG. 9 is replaced with “Tumble Replay”. . As a result, the first stop is the first advantage when one of left push replay 1, left push replay 2, middle push replay 1, middle push replay 2, right push replay 1, and right push replay 2 is won. When operated according to the operating procedure, one of the “replays” is won, when the first stop is not operated according to the first advantageous operating procedure, and the second stop and the third stop are the second advantageous operating procedure. When one of the “banana replays” is won, the first stop is not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, and the second stop and the third stop are in the second advantageous operation procedure. The reel control is performed so as to win one of the “falling replays” when not operated.

This will be specifically described below. First, the case where the left push replay 1 is won will be described.
When winning left push replay 1 and left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, any one of replays 1 to 8 of the selected replays is won regardless of the operation procedure for stopping the second and third stops. The reel is controlled to stop at the same time.

  On the other hand, when the left push replay 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to draw the “banana” of the first stopped reel onto the winning line. Therefore, none of the replays 1 to 8 among the selected replays can be stopped in line with the winning line. However, the left push replay 1 includes the banana replay 9 having the “banana” of the middle reel 2C as a constituent symbol and the banana replay 2 having the “banana” of the right reel 2R as a constituent symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the banana replay 2 are not arranged within 7 frames of the symbols of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C (“black grapes”). In addition, the symbols constituting the banana replay 9 are not arranged within 7 frames for each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R ("black grape", "white grape").

  Therefore, when the left push replay 1 is won and the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the “banana” of the middle reel 2C is stopped on the winning line, so the “black grape” of the left reel 2L, When the second stop and the third stop are performed according to the operation procedure that is the stop timing for stopping the “white grape” on the reel 2R on the winning line, the banana replay 9 is won.

  Also, when the left push replay 1 is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the “banana” on the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line, so the “black grape” on the left reel 2L, The banana replay 2 is won when the second stop and the third stop are performed according to the operation procedure that is the stop timing for stopping the “black grapes” on the reel 2C on the winning line.

  In this way, even if the left push replay 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, it is possible to draw the banana replay configuration symbols that are likely to be won on the winning line. The banana replay 2 or 9 can be won only when the second stop and the third stop are performed according to the operation procedure as the stop timing.

  On the other hand, when the left push replay 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the operation becomes the stop timing at which the constituent symbols of the banana replay where the possibility of winning is left can be drawn on the winning line When the second stop and the third stop are not performed in the procedure, any of the fall replays 7 to 16 can be derived without winning any of the replays 1 to 8 and the banana replays 2 and 9.

  In addition, when the left push replay 2 is won, the reel control is performed so that any one of the replays 1 to 8 is awarded when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time. When one stop was made, the second and third stops were made in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana replay of the banana replay 5 and the banana replay 12 with the possibility of winning could be drawn on the winning line. Only when the reel control is performed so as to win the corresponding banana replay, in any other case, any of the fall replays 7 to 16 can be derived.

  In addition, when the middle push replay 1 is won, the reel control is performed so that any one of the replays 1 to 8 is surely won when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time. When the banana replay 4 and the banana replay 8 are stopped, the second ban replay and the third stop are performed in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana replay configuration symbols that can be won are drawn on the winning line. Only the reel control is performed so as to win the corresponding banana replay, and in any other case, any one of the fall replays 1 to 8 and 13 to 16 can be derived.

  In addition, when the middle push replay 2 is won, the reel control is performed so that one of the replays 1 to 8 is surely won when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time. When the banana replay 7 and the banana replay 11 are stopped, the second ban replay 11 and the third ban replay are displayed in accordance with an operation procedure at a stop timing that can be drawn into the winning line. Only the reel control is performed so as to win the corresponding banana replay, and in any other case, any one of the fall replays 1 to 8 and 13 to 16 can be derived.

  Further, when the right push replay 1 is won, the reel control is performed so as to surely win any of the replays 1 to 8 when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time. When one stop was made, the second and third stops were made in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana replay of the banana replay 1 and the banana replay 3 that could be won could be drawn on the winning line. Only when the reel control is performed to win the corresponding banana replay, in any other case, one of the fall replays 1 to 12 can be derived.

  In addition, when the right push replay 2 is won, the reel control is performed so that any one of the replays 1 to 8 is surely won when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time. When one stop was made, the second and third stops were made in accordance with the operation procedure at the stop timing at which the banana replay of the banana replay 6 and the banana replay 10 with the possibility of winning could be drawn on the winning line. Only when the reel control is performed to win the corresponding banana replay, in any other case, one of the fall replays 1 to 12 can be derived.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the replays 1 to 8 are surely performed depending on whether the left push replay 1 or 2 is won, the middle press replay 1 or 2 is won, or the right press replay 1 or 2 is won. The first stop reel for winning can be made different. Even when “banana” is stopped on the winning line due to the first stop, left press replay 1, left press replay 2, center press replay 1, center press replay 2, right press replay 1, and right press replay 2 Depending on which of them is won, the operation procedure (second stop and third stop operation timing) for winning the corresponding banana replay can be varied. Thereby, depending on which of the left push replay 1, left push replay 2, middle push replay 1, middle push replay 2, right push replay 1, and right push replay 2 is won, an operation for winning a replay The procedure, the operation procedure for winning the banana replay, and the operation procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning can be made different.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the halfway navigation effect described in the first embodiment is won by replays 1 to 8 and banana replay (that is, when left-play replay 1 or the like is won). However, the complete navigation effect is not executed, the first stop is performed, “banana” is stopped on the winning line, and it is executed in the middle stage of the game where it becomes impossible to win any of the replays 1 to 8. In the midway navigation effect in the second embodiment, an advantageous operation procedure for deriving a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player (for example, a banana replay to be won simultaneously with replays 1 to 8) is informed in an identifiable manner (see FIG. 11 (b4)).

  The advantageous operation procedure that is notified by the midway navigation effect in the second embodiment is one of the left push replay 2, the middle push replay 1, the middle push replay 2, the right push replay 1, and the right push replay 2. Sometimes, the procedure is to stop the second stop reel and the third stop reel for the second stop and the third stop in order to win the banana replay. As a result, when a navigation effect is performed on the way, it is possible to intentionally stop the operation procedure at the timing for winning a banana replay that has a possibility of winning according to the winning situation of the replay. It is possible to win a banana replay and avoid a fall replay win.

Next, main effects obtained by the second embodiment will be described.
(1) In the second embodiment described above, when the complete navigation effect is executed, if the fall replay and other replays (left-press replay etc.) are won, the fall replay winning is intentionally avoided. It can be operated by an operation procedure for winning another replay. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the complete navigation effect is executed and the AT mode in which the complete navigation effect is executed is controlled.

  In addition, regarding the game won in the fall replay and other replays (left-press replay, etc.), when the complete navigation effect is not executed, the “banana” cannot be operated in the first advantageous operation procedure. Even when stopping on the winning line, when the second stop and the third stop after the first stop are operated by the second advantageous operation procedure (see FIG. 9), the banana replay is to be won. It is possible to avoid falling replay winnings. The second advantageous operation procedure is notified by an intermediate navigation effect. For this reason, even when the complete navigation effect is not executed, that is, when the mode is not the AT mode and the operation cannot be performed in the first advantageous operation procedure and “banana” stops on the winning line, the second stop thereafter Further, it can be expected that the third stop is operated by the second advantageous operation procedure, and that the navigation effect is performed on the way. As a result, in the game won for the fall replay and other replays, the expectation for avoiding the fall replay prize can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the second embodiment described above, in the game won in the fall replay and other replays (left-press replay, etc.), the complete navigation effect is not executed, and the first stop is the first advantageous operation procedure. When the navigation effect is executed on the way when it is not operated, the special effect shown in FIG. 11 (b3) is executed immediately after the first stop, as in the first embodiment. For this reason, the special effect gives the player the impression that the second advantageous operation procedure will be informed afterward and the second advantageous operation procedure will be notified, and the pleasure of notifying the second advantageous operation procedure. Can be prevented as much as possible before the middle navigation effect is executed or before the second stop is performed without noticing the middle navigation effect.

  (3) In the second embodiment described above, when the complete navigation effect is not executed in RT1 and RT2 which are advantageous to the player over other game states in that the winning probability of replay is high, Even when the first stop is not operated by the first advantageous operation procedure, the second stop and the third stop are operated by the second advantageous operation procedure, so that the fall replay winning and the normal game state are achieved. It is possible to avoid being controlled. For this reason, even if it is a mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed and “banana” is stopped on the winning line as a result of the first stop being not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, the intermediate navigation effect is not performed. By being executed and operated according to the second advantageous operation procedure, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for continuing RT1 and RT2 without ending them.

  In the slot machine according to the second embodiment described above, the same technical effect as that of the first embodiment described above can be obtained with respect to the configuration based on the technical idea common to the first embodiment described above. it can.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the first advantageous operation procedure for winning grapes when grapes and banana grapes are won is which reel is first stopped, that is, the pushing order. Second advantageous operation for winning banana grapes and avoiding special derivation (control to RT1) after grapes can no longer be won without being stopped in the first advantageous operation procedure The example in which the procedure is the operation timing for stopping the operation at a timing at which a predetermined symbol can be drawn onto the winning line has been described. In the second embodiment, when the replay and the banana replay are won, the first advantageous operation procedure for winning the replay is the pressing order, and the stop operation is not performed in the first advantageous operation procedure. An example in which the second advantageous operation procedure for winning the banana replay and avoiding the falling replay winning after the player cannot win the replay is the operation timing has been described.

  However, the first advantageous operation procedure is not limited to the pressing order, but may be an operation timing or a combination of the pressing order and the operation timing. Further, the second advantageous operation procedure is not limited to the operation timing, and may be a pressing order, or a combination of the pressing order and the operation timing. In the third embodiment, an example in which the first advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation procedure are both in the pushing order will be described. Note that in the third embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram for describing the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations in the third embodiment. In FIG. 26, the same symbols as “Grape 1-8”, “Banana Grapes 1-12”, “Tumble Replay 1, 2”, “Control Replay 1, 2”, and “Special” shown in FIG. The winning combination of the combination is not set, and the “promotional replay” of the re-gamer is set as the winning combination of the same symbol combination as the “normal replay” shown in FIG. “Replay” “Normal Replay” is set as a winning combination with the same symbol combination as “”, and “Troll Fall Replays 1 to 3” of Replaying Player, 9 "Grape" is set.

  Grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is available on any of the winning lines. The “grape” symbol in the third embodiment refers to both “black grape” and “white grape” shown in FIG. Therefore, the symbols constituting the grape (“grape”) are arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Therefore, in principle, it can be said that grapes can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if they are won.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the grape is won in the preparation mode or RT2, it is controlled to RT1. Even if a grape is won in a game mode other than the preparation mode or RT2, it is not controlled by RT1. In the third embodiment, after the grape stops in the preparation mode or RT2, it is controlled to RT1. RT1 is continuously controlled until a bonus is won, a promotion replay is won, or a fall replay is won.

  The fall replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “grape-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The tumble replay 2 is awarded when a combination of “banana-grape-banana” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The falling replay 3 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. As described above, the “grape” symbol in the third embodiment refers to both “black grape” and “white grape” shown in FIG. Therefore, the symbols ("grape" and "banana") that constitute each of the fall replays 1 to 3 are arranged within 7 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. ing. Therefore, each of the fall replays 1 to 3 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, in principle, if the winning replays are won. As shown in FIG. 26, in the third embodiment, after winning one of the fall replays 1 to 3 in RT1 or RT2, it is controlled to the normal gaming state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the combination of the lottery object combination read out as the lottery object combination for each gaming state in the third embodiment will be described.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the preparation mode, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role Each part of the group, each part of the BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, 1 piece 1, grapes, normal replay are subject to internal lottery, It is sequentially read out as a target combination.

  When the gaming state is RT1, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group, BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 piece 1, one piece 1, grape, normal replay, left push replay, middle push replay, right push replay are internal lottery It becomes a target and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery.

  In the third embodiment, left-press replay, middle-press replay, and right-press replay each indicate the next winning combination. Left-press replay means promotion replay + falling replay 2,3. Middle push replay means promotion replay + falling replay 1, 3. The right push replay means promotion replay + falling replay 1 and 2.

  When the game state is RT2 or internal RT, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + small role group, BB2 + small role group, BB3 + small role group, BB4 + small role group Each role of BB5 + small role group, melon, strawberry 1, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2, strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 + 1 sheet 1, 1 sheet 1, grape, normal replay, left press replay, middle press replay, right press replay Are subject to internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery. In RT2, even if the promotion replay is won and won, RT2 is maintained. In the internal RT, even if the BB is read at the same time as the small role group and won, the winning flag of the BB that triggered the control to the internal RT is maintained. The target combination read by the internal lottery when the gaming state is RB1 and RB2 is the same as in the first embodiment.

  Next, reel control when replay is won will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when the replay is won in the third embodiment.

  For example, when the normal replay is won alone, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with any winning line and stopped regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  On the other hand, when one of left push replay, middle push replay and right push replay is won, the following reel control is performed.

First, the case where the left-press replay is won will be described.
If the left reel 2L is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, regardless of the operation procedure for stopping the second and third stops, the reels that stop the promoted replays in line with the winning line, regardless of the operation procedure for stopping the second reel Control is performed.

  On the other hand, when the left push replay is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the promoted replay is performed according to the pushing order of the second stop, that is, which reel is to be stopped second. Reel control is performed to draw either of the falling replays on the winning line.

  As shown in FIG. 28, after the left push replay is won and the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, as a second stop, when the left reel 2L is stopped, the promotion replay is drawn onto the winning line, When the right reel 2R is stopped, reel control for pulling the fall replay 3 onto the winning line is performed.

  In addition, after the left push replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, as the second stop, when the left reel 2L is stopped, the promotion replay is drawn on the winning line and the middle reel 2C is stopped. If it is made, reel control for pulling the fall replay 2 onto the winning line is performed.

Next, the case where the middle press replay is won will be described.
Reel control to stop the promotion replay of the selected replays in line with the winning line regardless of the operation procedure to stop the second reel and the third stop when the middle reel replay is won for the first stop. Is done.

  In addition, after the middle push replay is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, as the second stop, when the middle reel 2C is stopped, the promotion replay is drawn on the winning line and the right reel 2R is stopped. In the case of the reel, the reel control for pulling the fall replay 3 onto the winning line is performed.

  In addition, after the middle push replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, as the second stop, when the middle reel 2C is stopped, the promotion replay is drawn on the winning line and the left reel 2L is stopped. In such a case, reel control is performed to pull the fall replay 1 onto the winning line.

Next, a case where a right-press replay is won will be described.
If the right-play replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, regardless of the operation procedure for stopping the second stop and the third stop, the reels that stop the promoted replay among the selected replays in line with the winning line Control is performed.

  In addition, after the right push replay is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the second reel is stopped. When the right reel 2R is stopped, the promotion replay is drawn on the winning line and the middle reel 2C is stopped. If it is made, reel control for pulling the fall replay 2 onto the winning line is performed.

  In addition, after the right push replay is won and the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, as the second stop, when the right reel 2R is stopped, the promotion replay is drawn on the winning line and the left reel 2L is stopped. If it is made, reel control is performed to pull the fall replay 1 onto the winning line.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the promotion replay is won and the fall replay winning is avoided depending on whether the left push replay is won, the middle push replay is won, or the right push replay is won. 1 stop reel can be made different. Accordingly, the first advantageous operation procedure for winning the promotion replay and avoiding the fall replay winning can be varied depending on which of the left push replay, middle push replay, and right push replay is won. . Further, in the third embodiment, even when the promotion replay is won and the reel different from the first stop reel for avoiding the fall replay winning is first stopped, the promotion replay is won and There is a second advantageous operation procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning, and the second advantageous operation procedure is determined depending on whether the left-press replay is won, the middle-press replay is won, or the right-press replay is won. Can be different.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the halfway navigation effect described in the first embodiment is when the promotion replay and the fall replay are won (that is, when the left press replay is won). The complete navigation effect is not executed, and the reel for surely winning the promotion replay is executed in the middle of the game where the first stop is not stopped. In the midway navigation effect in the third embodiment, an advantageous operation procedure at the time of the second stop for deriving a symbol combination (for example, promotion replay) advantageous to the player is informed in an identifiable manner.

  Here, an example of the navigation effect in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of a navigation effect in the third embodiment. FIG. 29 shows reels 2L to 2R that can be visually recognized from the see-through window 3 and a navigation effect area 58 in the configuration of the slot machine 1 as in FIG.

  FIG. 29 illustrates an example in which a complete navigation effect is executed and a midway navigation effect is executed when the winning situation is winning for left-press replay.

  FIGS. 29A1 to 29A2 are diagrams for explaining an example of a complete navigation effect. If the left-press replay is won, as shown in FIG. 28, the left reel 2L is stopped first, so that the normal replay can be surely performed regardless of the operation procedure of the second stop and the third stop. You can win a prize. Therefore, the first advantageous operation procedure is a procedure for first stopping the left reel 2L.

  For this reason, in FIG. 29 (a1), the reel information frame 58L is set to “1” so as to remind the first stop of the left reel 2L when the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and the game is started. Is displayed, “·” is displayed in each of the reel information frames 58C and 58R, and a complete navigation effect is performed. Thereby, the player can recognize that the left reel 2L should be stopped for the first time, and can surely receive the promotion replay as long as the operation is not mistaken. In FIG. 11 (a 2 ′), the left reel 2 </ b> L is first stopped as a complete navigation effect, and a message “correct” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58. It should be noted that a message such as “failure” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58 when the operation procedure is not performed according to the complete navigation effect.

  The first advantageous operation procedure informed by the complete navigation effect is the first advantageous operation for reliably winning the normal replay shown in FIG. 28 when either the middle press replay or the right press replay is won. This is a procedure for first stopping the stop reel. As a result, when the complete navigation effect is executed, the reel for winning the promotion replay can be stopped first according to the winning situation of the replay. Can be avoided.

  FIGS. 29B1 to 29B4 'are diagrams for explaining an example of a midway navigation effect. FIG. 29 (b1) shows a state where the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and the game is started. In each of the reel information frames 58L, 58C and 58R in the navigation effect area 58, “?” It is displayed. Thereby, the player cannot specify which reel should be stopped for the first time, and cannot stop the first in the procedure of intentionally winning the promoted replay.

  FIG. 29 (b2) shows a state when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time. If the left push replay is won and the left reel 2L is not stopped for the first time, either the promotion replay or the fall replay will be awarded according to the pushing order of the second stop, that is, which reel is to be stopped second. Reel control for drawing on the line is performed.

  In the case of winning the left push replay, as shown in FIG. 28, even if the left reel 2L is not first stopped, if the middle reel 2C is first stopped, Promotional replay can be won by stopping the left reel 2L as 2 stops, and when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, promotion of replay is awarded by stopping the left reel 2L as a second stop. be able to.

  Therefore, the second advantageous operation procedure is a procedure of stopping the left reel 2L as the second stop.

  Immediately after the first stop, as shown in FIG. 29 (b 3), after performing a special effect by displaying a specific character and displaying a message “Still More!” In the navigation effect area 58. 29 (b4 ′), “2” is displayed in the reel information frame 58L to remind that the left reel 2L is stopped for the second time and the right reel 2R is stopped for the third time, and the reel information is displayed. “3” is displayed in the frame 58R, “•” is displayed in the reel information frame 58C, and a navigation effect is being performed on the way. Thereby, the player can recognize that the left reel 2L should be stopped for the second time, and can make the promotion replay win and avoid the fall replay win unless the operation is wrong.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described third embodiment will be described.
(1) In the above-described third embodiment, when a complete navigation effect is executed, if a promotion replay and a fall replay (left-press replay, etc.) are won, a promotion replay is intentionally awarded and a fall replay prize is won. The first stop operation can be performed by an operation procedure for avoiding the above. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the complete navigation effect is executed and the AT mode in which the complete navigation effect is executed is controlled.

  In addition, regarding a game won for promotion replay and fall replay (left-press replay, etc.), when the complete navigation effect is not executed, and the operation cannot be performed in the first advantageous operation procedure. In addition, when the second stop after the first stop is operated according to the second advantageous operation procedure shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to make a promotion replay and to avoid a fall replay winning. The second advantageous operation procedure is notified by an intermediate navigation effect. For this reason, even when the complete navigation effect is not executed, that is, when the mode is not the AT mode and the operation cannot be performed by the first advantageous operation procedure, the subsequent second stop is performed by the second advantageous operation procedure. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the navigation will be performed and the navigation effect will be executed on the way. As a result, in games won for promotion replay and fall replay, it is possible to avoid the fall replay prize and to maintain the expectation that RT1 will win the promotion replay and be controlled by RT2. Interest can be improved.

  (2) In the third embodiment described above, in a game won for promotion replay and fall replay (left-press replay, etc.), the complete navigation effect is not executed, and the first stop is operated by the first advantageous operation procedure. When the navigation effect is executed midway when it is not performed, the special effect shown in FIG. 29 (b3) is executed immediately after the first stop, as in the first embodiment. For this reason, the special effect gives the player the impression that the second advantageous operation procedure will be informed afterward and the second advantageous operation procedure will be notified, and the pleasure of notifying the second advantageous operation procedure. Can be prevented as much as possible before the middle navigation effect is executed or before the second stop is performed without noticing the middle navigation effect.

  (3) In the above-described third embodiment, when the promotion replay and the fall replay (left push replay, etc.) are won in RT1, the complete navigation effect is not executed, and the first stop is Even when it is not operated by the first advantageous operation procedure, the second stop is operated by the second advantageous operation procedure, so that the promotion replay winning is avoided and the RT2 is controlled while avoiding the falling replay winning. be able to. For this reason, even if it is a mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed in RT1 and the first stop is not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, the navigation effect is executed on the way and the second advantageous operation procedure is executed. By operating at, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for being controlled to RT2 that reduces the winning probability of falling replay while avoiding being controlled to the normal gaming state.

  (4) In the third embodiment described above, even when the complete navigation effect is not executed in RT2, and the first stop is not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, By operating the second stop in accordance with the second advantageous operation procedure, it is possible to avoid the promotion replay being won and the falling replay being won and being controlled to the normal gaming state. For this reason, even in a mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed and the first stop is not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, the intermediate navigation effect is executed and the operation is performed in the second advantageous operation procedure. By doing so, the expectation for continuing RT2 without ending can be maintained.

  Further, in the slot machine according to the third embodiment described above, the configuration based on the technical idea common to each of the first to second embodiments described above is the same as that of each of the first to second embodiments described above. The technical effect can be obtained.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first and second embodiments described above, the first advantageous operation procedure is the pushing order, and the second advantageous operation procedure is the operation timing. In the third embodiment, the first advantageous operation procedure is the first operation procedure. The one advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation procedure are both illustrated in the pressing order. In the fourth embodiment, an example in which both the first advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation procedure are operation timings will be described. Note that in the fourth embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram for describing the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 30 (a), the winning combination of the same symbol combination as “Grape 1-8” and “Banana grape 1-12” shown in FIG. 5 is not set, and as a winning combination of a new symbol combination, “Grape”, “Black 7 Grapes 1-3”, “White 7 Grapes 1-3”, and “BAR Grapes 1-3” are set.

  In addition, the “grape” symbol in the fourth embodiment refers to both “black grape” and “white grape” shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), among the symbol combinations of “falling replays 1 and 2” shown in FIG. 5, the “Black Grapes” symbol and the “White Grapes” symbol are changed to “Grapes” symbols. “Tumble Fall Replay” is set as a role.

  Also, in FIG. 30 (b), "blank 1-grape-melon", "banana-grape-melon", "melon-" are replaced with the symbol combination of "special appearance" shown in FIG. 5 (b). Symbol combinations of “Grape-Melon”, “Blank 1—Grape-Blank 1”, “Banana-Grape-Blank 1”, and “Mellon-Grape-Blank 1” are set as special items. In the preparation mode or RT2, no winning has occurred, and when the special outcome is derived, the RT1 is controlled.

  Grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is available on any of the winning lines. Therefore, the symbols constituting the grape (“grape”) are arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Therefore, in principle, it can be said that grapes can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if they are won.

  The black 7 grape 1 is awarded when the combination of “black 7-grape-grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. Black 7 grape 2 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-grape-white 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The black 7 grape 3 is awarded when the combination of “black 7-grape-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  The white 7 grape 1 is awarded when the combination of “white 7-grape-grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The white 7 grape 2 is awarded when the combination of “white 7-grape-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The white 7 grape 3 is awarded when the combination of “white 7-grape-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  Further, the BAR grape 1 is awarded when a combination of “BAR-grape-grape” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The BAR grape 2 is awarded when a combination of “BAR-grape-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The BAR grape 3 is awarded when a combination of “BAR-grape-white 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, among the symbols constituting each of the black 7 grapes 1 to 3, the white 7 grapes 1 to 3, and the BAR grapes 1 to 3, the “grape” is within 7 frames in each of the right reels 2R. Although it is arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C, each of “Black 7”, “White 7” and “BAR” is arranged within 7 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R. Not. For this reason, even if one of black 7 grapes 1 to 3, white 7 grapes 1 to 3, and BAR grapes 1 to 3 is won, the left symbol and the right symbol among the selected symbol combinations If the symbols to be constructed are not operated at an appropriate timing that can be drawn on the winning line, no winning will occur.

  Next, the special appearance will be described with reference to FIG. Special items include nine types of symbol combinations shown in FIG. 30B, such as “banana-melon-grape”. In the fourth embodiment, the reel control for stopping at any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 in the fourth embodiment is black 7 grapes 1 to 3, white 7 grapes 1 to 3, and BAR grape 1 in any gaming state. It is performed when one of -3 is won and the selected grape is missed. As a result, when winning one of the black 7 grapes 1 to 3, the white 7 grapes 1 to 3, and the BAR grapes 1 to 3, the symbol constituting the selected type of grape is won. If none of the lines L1 to L4 can be stopped, the reel control is performed so that the special outcome is stopped on any of the winning lines L1 to L4.

  After the special event stops in the preparation mode or RT2, it is controlled to RT1. RT1 is continuously controlled until a bonus is won, a promotion replay is won, or a fall replay is won. Even if the special game is stopped in the game mode other than the preparation mode or RT2, it is not controlled by RT1. Even if the special outcome is stopped at RT1, the control to RT1 is maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the combination of the lottery object combination read as the lottery object combination for each gaming state in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 31, the game state is read out as a target combination of the internal lottery in the normal game state, the preparation mode, RT1, RT2, and the internal RT “left pressed grapes 1, 2, middle pressed grapes 1, 2, and right pressed grapes 1, 2 "Black 7 grapes", "White 7 grapes", and "BAR grapes" are read out as target roles for internal lottery.

  Black 7 grape means black 7 grape 1 + white 7 grape 2 + BAR grape 2. White 7 grape means white 7 grape 1 + black 7 grape 2+ BAR grape 3. BAR grape means BAR grape 1 + black 7 grape 3 + white 7 grape 3.

  Next, the reel control when any one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won will be described. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time when any of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won in the fourth embodiment. is there. That is, FIG. 32 illustrates reel control when the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R when any of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won.

First, the case of winning 7 black grapes will be described.
When winning the black 7 grapes and making the first stop at the stop timing to stop “Black 7” on the left reel 2L on the winning line, it was won regardless of the operating procedure for the second stop and the third stop. Reel control is performed to stop black 7 grapes 1 among the grapes in line with the winning line.

  On the other hand, when the black 7 grapes are won and the “black 7” of the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time at a stop timing that cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “BAR” or “ Reel control is performed to stop “White 7” on the winning line. For this reason, among the selected grapes, it is impossible to stop black 7 grapes 1 in line with the winning line. However, the black 7 grapes include the BAR grapes 2 having the symbol “BAR” on the left reel 2L and the white 7 grapes 2 having the symbol “white 7” on the left reel 2L.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the design of the right reel 2R constituting the BAR grape 2 and the design of the right reel 2R constituting the white 7 grape 2 are not arranged within 7 frames. It is.

  Therefore, when winning the black 7 grapes and “black 7” of the left reel 2L could not be stopped on the winning line, when the right reel 2R is stopped in the second stop or the third stop, When the “Black 7” of the right reel 2R is stopped at the stop timing to stop it on the winning line, it is possible to stop the white 7 grapes 2 or the BAR grapes 2 out of the selected grapes in alignment with the winning line.

  In this way, even if black 7 grapes are won and “Black 7” of the left reel 2L cannot be stopped on the winning line, the constituent symbols of the grapes that are still likely to win are displayed in the winning line. Only when the second stop or the third stop is performed in accordance with an operation procedure that is a stop timing that can be pulled up, the corresponding white 7 grape 2 or BAR grape 2 can be won.

  On the other hand, if the black 7 grapes are selected and “Black 7” of the left reel 2L cannot be stopped on the winning line, the constituent symbols of the grapes that are likely to win can be drawn on the winning line. When the second stop or the third stop is not performed in the operation procedure that is the stop timing, the black 7 grape 1, the white 7 grape 2, and the BAR grape 2 are not won, and the special shown in FIG. Any of the outcomes can be derived.

Next, the case where 7 white grapes are won will be described.
When winning 7 white grapes and making the first stop at the stop timing to stop “White 7” on the left reel 2L on the winning line, it was won regardless of the second stop and the third stop operation procedure. Reel control is performed to stop white 7 grapes 1 among the grapes in line with the winning line.

  On the other hand, when the white 7 grape is won and the “white 7” of the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time at a stop timing at which it cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “BAR” or “ Reel control is performed to stop “Black 7” on the winning line. For this reason, among the selected grapes, the white 7 grapes 1 cannot be aligned with the winning line and stopped. However, the white 7 grapes include the BAR grape 3 having the symbol “BAR” on the left reel 2L and the black 7 grape 2 having the symbol “black 7” on the left reel 2L.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the design of the right reel 2R constituting the BAR grape 3 and the design of the right reel 2R constituting the black 7 grape 2 are not arranged within 7 frames. Is.

  Therefore, when winning the white 7 grape and “white 7” of the left reel 2L could not be stopped on the winning line, when stopping the right reel 2R in the second stop or the third stop, If the “white 7” of the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line, the black 7 grapes 2 or the BAR grapes 3 among the selected grapes can be stopped in alignment with the winning line.

  In this way, even if 7 white grapes are won and “White 7” of the left reel 2L cannot be stopped on the winning line, the winning symbol is the composition pattern of the grapes where the possibility of winning is left. The black 7 grape 2 or the BAR grape 3 can be won only when the second stop or the third stop is performed according to the operation procedure that is the stop timing that can be pulled up.

  On the other hand, if the white 7 grapes are selected and “White 7” of the left reel 2L cannot be stopped on the winning line, it is possible to draw the constituent symbols of the grapes where the possibility of winning is left on the winning line. When the second stop or the third stop is not performed in the operation procedure that is the stop timing, the black 7 grape 2, the white 7 grape 1, and the BAR grape 3 are not won, and the special shown in FIG. Any of the outcomes can be derived.

Next, the case where BAR grape is won will be described.
When the BAR grape is won and the “BAR” of the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line for the first stop, regardless of the operation procedure for stopping the second and third stops, Of these, reel control is performed to stop the BAR grapes 1 in line with the winning line.

  On the other hand, when the BAR grape is won and the “BAR” of the left reel 2L is stopped at the stop timing at which it cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “black 7” or “white” of the left reel 2L is stopped. The reel control is performed so that “7” stops on the winning line. This makes it impossible to stop the BAR grapes 1 among the selected grapes in line with the winning line. However, the BAR grape includes black 7 grapes 3 having “black 7” on the left reel 2L as a constituent symbol and white 7 grapes 3 having “white 7” on the left reel 2L as a constituent symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the design of the right reel 2R composing the black 7 grape 3 and the design of the right reel 2R composing the white 7 grape 3 are not arranged within 7 frames. It is.

  Therefore, if the BAR grape is won and the “BAR” of the left reel 2L cannot be stopped on the winning line, the right reel 2R is stopped when the right reel 2R is stopped in the second stop or the third stop. When the 2R “BAR” is stopped on the winning line, the black 7 grapes 3 or the white 7 grapes 3 among the selected grapes can be stopped in line with the winning line.

  In this way, even if the BAR grapes are won and the “BAR” of the left reel 2L cannot be stopped on the winning line, the constituent symbols of the grapes that are still likely to win are displayed on the winning line. Only when the second stop or the third stop is performed according to the operation procedure at which the pull-in can be stopped, the corresponding black 7 grape 3 or white 7 grape 3 can be won.

  On the other hand, when BAR grapes are won and “BAR” on the left reel 2L cannot be stopped on the winning line, the stop timing at which the constituent symbols of the grapes that are likely to win can be drawn on the winning line When the second stop or the third stop is not performed in the operation procedure as follows, none of the black 7 grapes 3, the white 7 grapes 3 and the BAR grapes 1 are won, and the special appearance shown in FIG. Can be derived.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the stop timing of the left reel 2L for reliably winning the grape is different depending on whether the black 7 grapes are won, the white 7 grapes are won, or the BAR grapes are won. Can be made. Also, even when the left reel 2L could not be stopped at the time to win the grapes reliably, whether 7 black grapes, 7 white grapes were won, or BAR grapes were won Accordingly, it is possible to vary the operation timing of the right reel 2R for winning a grape that has a possibility of winning. This avoids the operation procedure for winning the grapes and the derivation of special eyes (control to RT1) depending on which of the 7 black grapes, 7 white grapes, or BAR grapes is won. The operation procedure can be made different.

  As described above, in FIG. 32, the reel control when the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R when any of the black 7 grapes, the white 7 grapes, and the BAR grapes is won has been described.

  In this case, when any of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, or BAR grapes is won, as long as the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R, the grapes have a probability of 1/3 regardless of the subsequent operations. Can be won.

  Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R, even if it is operated at a timing different from the stop timing at which the corresponding grape can be surely won, the right reel 2R is maintained thereafter. Can be operated at the stop timing of winning grapes with a probability of 1/3. Further, as described above, the “grape” on the middle reel 2C can be stopped on the winning line regardless of the operation procedure (operation timing).

  Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R, even if it is operated at a timing different from the stop timing at which the corresponding grape can be surely won, it stops on the winning line. From the design of the left reel 2L, it is possible to narrow down the design of the right reel 2R that will win a grape to two choices. For example, when the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R, it is operated at a timing different from the stop timing at which the corresponding grape can be surely won, and the “black 7” of the left reel 2L is placed on the winning line. ”Is stopped, the symbol of the right reel 2R that is a grape winning can be narrowed down to“ Grape ”,“ White 7 ”, or“ BAR ”, but among these symbols,“ Grape ”is regardless of the operation timing. Since the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it can be narrowed down to two choices of “white 7” or “BAR”.

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, even if it is not possible to specify which grape is won, as long as the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R, according to the stop pattern of the left reel 2L. Even if the right reel 2R is stopped without so-called pressing, grapes can be won with a probability of 1/3 + 2/3 × 1/3 = 5/9, and the right reel 2L can be selected according to the stop pattern of the left reel 2L. When the reel 2R is stopped by so-called pushing, grapes can be won with a higher probability of 1/3 + 2/3 × 1/2 = 2/3.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when any one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won and the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L, for example, Regardless of whether a grape is won or not, reel control is performed to stop the “vine” on the right reel 2R on the winning line.

  When the “vine” on the right reel 2R stops on the winning line, the “white 7”, “BAR”, and “black 7” on the right reel 2R are placed on the winning line from the symbol arrangement of the right reel 2R shown in FIG. It cannot be stopped. For this reason, when any one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won and the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L, the “white 7” and “BAR” of the right reel 2R. , Black 7 Grapes 2 and 3, Black 7 Grapes 2 and 3 and BAR Grapes 2 and 3 cannot be stopped in line with the winning line. Of the 7 grapes 1 and BAR grapes 1, only the selected grapes can be stopped in line with the winning line.

  For this reason, in the fourth embodiment, when the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L in a state where it is not possible to specify which grape is won, the grape has a probability of only 1/3. Can no longer win.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where it is not possible to identify which grape is won, the probability that the grape can be won is 1 when the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L. On the other hand, when the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R, it becomes 5/9, and when the right reel 2R is further pushed, it becomes 2/3. That is, the reel control is performed so that the probability of winning a grape is higher when the left reel 2L is stopped before the right reel 2R than when the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L. It is. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 2L before the right reel 2R.

  Next, navigation effects in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the halfway navigation effect described in the first embodiment is a case where one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won, and a complete navigation effect is executed. The left reel 2L cannot be stopped at the stop timing for surely winning the grapes. In the midway navigation effect in the fourth embodiment, an advantageous operation procedure for deriving a symbol combination (for example, black 7 grape 1 or the like) that is advantageous to the player is notified in an identifiable manner.

  Here, an example of the navigation effect in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for describing an example of a navigation effect in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 33 shows reels 2 </ b> L to 2 </ b> R that can be viewed through the see-through window 3 and a navigation effect area 58 in the configuration of the slot machine 1, as in FIG. 11.

  In FIG. 33, an example will be described in which a complete navigation effect is executed and a midway navigation effect is executed when the winning situation is winning 7 black grapes.

  FIG. 33 (a1 ″) to (a2 ″) is a diagram for explaining an example of a complete navigation effect. When winning the black 7 grape, as shown in FIG. 32, the “black 7” of the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line, so that the operation procedure of the second stop and the third stop is concerned. Without fail, the black 7 grape 1 can be surely won. Therefore, the first advantageous operation procedure is a procedure in which the first reel 2L is stopped at the timing when “Black 7” is stopped on the winning line.

  Therefore, in FIG. 33 (a1 ″), when the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and the game is started, the first stop is performed at the timing at which “black 7” is stopped on the winning line for the left reel 2L. As a reminder, “black 7” is displayed in the reel information frame 58L, and “·” is displayed in each of the reel information frames 58C and 58R, and a complete navigation effect is performed. Thereby, the player can recognize that “black 7” should be stopped first at the timing of stopping “black 7” on the winning line for the left reel 2L. You can be sure to win. In FIG. 11 (a2 ′), the first reel is stopped at the timing when “Black 7” is stopped on the winning line for the left reel 2L as shown in the complete navigation effect, and a message such as “correct answer” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58. Yes. It should be noted that a message such as “failure” is displayed in the navigation effect area 58 when the operation procedure is not performed according to the complete navigation effect.

  The first advantageous operation procedure notified by the complete navigation effect is that when one of white 7 grapes and BAR grapes is won, the white 7 grapes 1 or BAR grapes 1 shown in FIG. This is the procedure for winning a prize. As a result, when the complete navigation effect is executed, the black 7 grape 1, white 7 grape 1, or BAR grape 1 is surely won according to the winning situation of the grape, and the grape is dropped and a special appearance is derived. Can be avoided.

  33 (b1) to (b4 ″) are diagrams for explaining an example of the midway navigation effect. In FIG. 33 (b1), a state where the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and the game is started. However, “?” Is displayed in each of the reel information frames 58L, 58C, 58R in the navigation effect area 58. Accordingly, the player cannot specify in what procedure the stop operation should be performed, and the first stop is performed in a procedure for intentionally winning the black 7 grape 1, the white 7 grape 1, or the BAR grape 1 intentionally. I can't let you.

  FIG. 33 (b2 ″) shows a state in which the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time and “white 7” is stopped on the pay line. If black 7 grapes are won and “black 7” on the left reel 2L is not stopped on the winning line, either the white 7 grape 2 or the special roll will be selected according to the stop timing of the right reel 2R. Reel control for drawing on the winning line is performed.

  In the case of winning the black 7 grape, as shown in FIG. 32, even if the left reel 2L is not stopped at the timing of stopping the “black 7”, the “white” of the left reel 2L When “7” or “BAR” is stopped on the winning line, white 7 grape 2 can be won by being stopped at the timing of stopping “Black 7” of the right reel 2R on the winning line.

  Therefore, the second advantageous operation procedure is a procedure for performing a stop operation at the operation timing for stopping “Black 7” on the winning line for the right reel 2R.

  Immediately after the left reel 2L is stopped, as shown in FIG. 33 (b3 ″), a special effect is displayed by displaying a specific character and a message “Still More!” In the navigation effect area 58. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (b4 ″), the reel information frame 58R is set to “black” to remind that the right reel 2R should be stopped at the timing to stop “black 7” on the winning line. 7 ”is displayed,“ · ”is displayed in each of the reel information frames 58L and 58C, and a navigation effect is being performed on the way. Thus, the player can recognize that the “black 7” should be stopped at the timing for stopping “Black 7” on the winning line with respect to the right reel 2R. Thus, special derivation (control to RT1) can be avoided.

Next, main effects obtained by the fourth embodiment described above will be described.
(1) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the complete navigation effect is executed, when one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes is won, black 7 grapes 1 are intentionally used. , White 7 grape 1 and BAR grape 1 can be operated in the first advantageous operation procedure for winning. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the complete navigation effect will be executed.

  In addition, regarding the game selected as one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes, when the complete navigation effect was not executed, the game could not be operated according to the first advantageous operation procedure. Even when the second stop or the third stop after the first stop is operated according to the second advantageous operation procedure shown in FIG. Derivation of the outcome can be avoided. The second advantageous operation procedure is notified by an intermediate navigation effect. For this reason, even when the complete navigation effect is not executed, that is, when the mode is not the AT mode and the operation cannot be performed by the first advantageous operation procedure, the second stop or the third stop after that is not the second advantageous operation. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the operation is performed according to the operation procedure and that the navigation effect is performed on the way. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning one of the grapes in a game selected as one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes, and to improve the fun of the game. it can.

  (2) In the above-described fourth embodiment, in the game selected as one of black 7 grapes, white 7 grapes, and BAR grapes, the complete navigation effect is not executed, and the first stop is the first advantage. When no navigation operation is performed in the operating procedure and a midway navigation effect is executed, the special effect shown in Fig. 33 (b3 ") is executed immediately after the first stop. Thereafter, the player is surely impressed that the second advantageous operation procedure is notified by the execution of the middle navigation effect and the second advantageous operation procedure is notified, and the pleasure is given in the middle. It is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of inconvenience that the second stop is performed without noticing the navigation effect before or during the navigation effect.

  (3) In the fourth embodiment described above, the complete navigation effect is executed at RT2, which is more advantageous to the player than the other gaming states in that the winning probability of normal replay is high and the winning probability of falling replay is low. Even if the first stop is not operated by the first advantageous operation procedure, the second stop or the third stop is operated by the second advantageous operation procedure, so that It is possible to avoid that the outcome is derived and controlled by RT1. For this reason, even in a mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed and the first stop is not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, the intermediate navigation effect is executed and the operation is performed in the second advantageous operation procedure. By doing so, the expectation for continuing RT2 without ending can be maintained.

  In the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration based on the technical idea common to each of the first to third embodiments described above is the same as the case of each of the first to third embodiments described above. The technical effect can be obtained.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, when a specific winning situation (for example, winning a left-pressed grape in the first embodiment) is reached and the complete navigation effect is not executed, When the first stop is not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure and the navigation effect is executed halfway, the special effect shown in FIG. 11 (b3) or the like is executed immediately after the first stop is performed, An example has been described in which the second stop is prevented as much as possible before the navigation effect on the way is executed. However, in order to prevent the second stop before the midway navigation effect is executed, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second, a period until the special effect is started) after the first stop is performed. ) May not be forcibly received until the second stop operation has elapsed, that is, the timing for effectively receiving the second stop operation may be delayed.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, when one of the left pressed grape 1, the left pressed grape 2, the middle pressed grape 1, the middle pressed grape 2, the right pressed grape 1, and the right pressed grape 2 is won. When the first stop is made, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the first stop is operated by the first advantageous operation procedure according to the winning situation, and the first advantageous operation is performed. When it is determined that the operation is performed according to the procedure, the second stop and the third stop can be effectively accepted. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation is not performed according to the first advantageous operation procedure, the operation is continued for a predetermined period. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the reel that is still rotating until the predetermined period elapses is performed so that the delay control for effectively not accepting the operation after the second stop is performed. It may be configured so as not to stop. As a result, even if the second stop operation is performed continuously (continuously) after the first stop operation, the second stop operation is effective if the predetermined period has not elapsed since the first stop. Is not accepted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the second stop operation is performed before confirming the midway navigation effect even though the midway navigation effect is executed on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  When configured as described above, even when the navigation control effect is not executed on the sub-control unit 91 side, the operation after the second stop is effectively accepted for a predetermined period when the first advantageous operation procedure is not performed. Control is performed so as not to exist. For this reason, the predetermined period during which the operation after the second stop is not accepted effectively is the minimum necessary time, for example, after the first stop operation is performed, the second stop operation is subsequently performed. In this case, a sufficient time (for example, 0.3 seconds) required from when the first stop operation is performed to when the second stop operation is performed may be set. Further, from the time when the first stop operation is performed until the predetermined period elapses, the sub-control unit 91 side performs a process for starting the special effect and a process for starting the midway navigation effect. You may make it perform. Thereby, while reducing the control burden and delaying the second stop over the minimum necessary period, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the second stop operation is performed before confirming the navigation effect on the way. Can do.

  (2) About the promotion replay and fall replay in the first embodiment described above, as shown in the third embodiment, the promotion replay and the fall replay are awarded according to the winning status of the promotion replay and the fall replay. The second advantageous procedure for making the promotion replay and avoiding the fall replay winning even if the first advantageous operation procedure for avoiding the game is different and the first advantageous operation procedure is not operated. You may comprise so that an advantageous operation procedure may differ.

  Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, “grape 1-8”, “banana grapes 1-12”, “falling replays 1, 2”, “control replays 1, 2” shown in FIG. In addition, the winning combination of the same symbol combination as that of the “special game” is not set, and the winning combination of the same symbol combination as that of the “normal replay” shown in FIG. As a winning combination of the same symbol combination as the “promotional replay” shown, it is set to “regular replay” of the re-combining role, and as a winning combination of the new symbol combination, “re-falling replays 1 to 3” of the re-playing role is set, With respect to the promotion replay and the fall replays 1 to 3, a combination similar to the left push replay, middle push replay and right push replay shown in FIG. 27 is read out as a lottery target combination, and reel control as shown in FIG. 28 is performed according to the winning situation. Be Sea urchin may be configured.

  Thereby, in the mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed, and the grapes 1 to 8 such as the left-pressed grape and the banana grape are won, the first stop is the first advantageous operation procedure (see FIG. 9). Even when “banana” is stopped on the winning line as a result of not being operated, RT2 is terminated by executing the second advantageous operation procedure (see FIG. 9) by executing the navigation effect on the way. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for continuing without any problems. Further, in the mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed in RT1, the first stop is operated in the first advantageous operation procedure (see FIG. 28) when the promotion replay and the fall replay such as the left push replay are won. Even if not, the winning probability of the fall replay is avoided while avoiding being controlled to the normal gaming state by performing the navigation effect on the way and operating in the second advantageous operation procedure (see FIG. 28). It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for being controlled by RT2 at which the value becomes low.

  (3) When a small prize winning with a medal payout occurs by being operated in the first advantageous operation procedure or the second advantageous operation procedure (for example, the first embodiment, the fourth embodiment) In the form), it may be configured such that the midway navigation effect can be executed even in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the ratio which misses the elected small part can be reduced by performing a navigation effect on the way.

  (4) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, when the complete navigation effect and the midway navigation effect are not executed, the first advantageous operation procedure corresponding to the specific winning situation is operated, You may comprise so that the ratio by which a middle navigation effect is performed after that by operating in the 2nd advantageous operation procedure may be improved. For example, the navigation execution ratio may be improved when the next winning situation is reached. Thereby, it is possible to give value to the operation by the first advantageous operation procedure according to the specific winning situation by itself or the operation by the second advantageous operation procedure, and to improve the interest of the game. Can do.

  (5) Even when a partial navigation effect is executed and not operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, the intermediate navigation effect may be executed according to the intermediate navigation execution ratio. For example, in the state of FIG. 11 (c1), when the operation is not performed in the first advantageous operation procedure, a special effect as shown in FIG. 11 (b3) is executed immediately after the operation is performed, and then FIG. You may comprise so that a middle navigation effect as shown to b4) may be performed. Thereby, even if it is not possible to operate in the first advantageous operation procedure when a partial navigation effect is executed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the navigation effect will be executed halfway thereafter.

  (6) The first stage that is the target for determining the derivation of the advantageous display result by being operated in the first advantageous operation procedure may be an operation excluding the final stop, for example, the first stop operation, Any of the operations such as the second stop operation, the first and second stop operations, and the operation on a specific reel may be used. Further, the second stage that is the target for determining the derivation of the advantageous display result by being operated in the second advantageous operation procedure may be an operation other than the first stop, for example, the second stop operation, Any operation such as a third stop operation, a second and third stop operation, and an operation on a specific reel may be used.

  (7) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, when a specific winning situation is reached, the derivation of the advantageous display result is confirmed by operating the first stage in the first advantageous operation procedure. An example of determining the derivation of the advantageous display result by operating the second stage after the second advantageous operation procedure even if the first stage is not operated by the first advantageous operation procedure. Explained. However, for example, when the first stage is operated by a procedure other than the first advantageous operation procedure, derivation of a display result (special appearance, fall replay, etc.) different from the advantageous display result is confirmed, and the first stage Is operated by the first advantageous operation procedure, the subsequent second stage is operated by a procedure other than the second advantageous operation procedure, thereby confirming the derivation of the display result different from the advantageous display result. The reel control is performed so that the advantageous display result is derived only when the first stage is operated by the first advantageous operation procedure and the second stage is operated by the second advantageous operation procedure. It may be configured. In this case, as the complete navigation effect, information for specifying the first advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation procedure may be notified. The intermediate navigation effect is to notify information for specifying the second advantageous operation procedure according to a predetermined execution rate on the condition that the first stage is operated by the first advantageous operation procedure. May be. Further, as the partial navigation effect, information for specifying any one of the procedures different from the first advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation procedure may be notified.

  In such a configuration, when the complete navigation effect is executed, the first advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation for intentionally deriving the advantageous display result when a specific winning situation is achieved. Can be operated in steps. In addition, when the partial navigation effect is executed, the first advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation procedure can be narrowed down when the specific winning situation is reached. It is possible to increase the possibility of operation by the advantageous operation procedure of 2. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that a complete navigation effect or a partial navigation effect is executed and that an advantageous display result is derived.

  In addition, even if the complete navigation effect and the partial navigation effect are not executed when a specific winning situation is reached, as long as the first stage can be operated by the first advantageous operation procedure, the middle The navigation effect is executed, and an advantageous display result can be derived by operating in the second advantageous operation procedure. Therefore, even when the complete navigation effect or the partial navigation effect is not executed, it is expected that the navigation effect may be executed midway as long as the first advantageous operation procedure can be used. be able to. As a result, a sense of expectation can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (8) In the first embodiment described above, for example, when winning grapes 1 to 8 and banana grapes (for example, left-pressed grapes), an advantageous procedure (No. 1 advantageous operation procedure and 2nd advantageous operation procedure), the 9 winning medals are paid out and the 9th medal is paid out, and the special outcome, as compared with the case of operating according to the procedure other than the advantageous procedure. An example has been described in which derivation can be avoided and control that increases the degree of advantage for the player is performed in that RT2 is not controlled by RT1. In the above-described third embodiment, for example, when promotion replay and fall replay (for example, left-press replay) are won, an advantageous procedure for winning the promotion replay and avoiding the fall replay winning ( When operating in the first advantageous operation procedure and the second advantageous operation procedure), for example, when it is RT1, it is promoted to RT2, and when it is RT2, the RT2 is An example has been described in which control that increases the degree of advantage for the player in that RT is continued without being controlled to the normal gaming state, such as being continued. However, the control that increases the degree of advantage for the player may be, for example, the following control.

  -In relation to the first embodiment, for example, in the case where different types of small roles with different medal payout numbers associated with winnings can be won simultaneously, a predetermined number corresponding to the type of small roles that are simultaneously won When an operation is accepted according to a procedure different from the advantageous procedure, a small role with a small medal payout number is awarded, and when an operation is accepted with an advantageous procedure, a small role with a large medal payout amount is awarded. It may be a thing. As a result, in a game in which small types of small medals with different medal payout numbers are simultaneously won, the game value that a player acquires when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in terms of increase in the number of players.

  In relation to the first embodiment, for example, in the case of RT1, control is made to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player when winning one of the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape When a special outcome that can be derived when the grapes 1 to 8 and the banana grape are dropped is derived, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player (for example, RT2), and when it is RT1, the grapes 1 to 8 are controlled. In the case where it is configured to execute a navigation effect according to the type of the winning situation when winning either of the banana grapes and the banana grapes, it is possible to draw in the selected grapes 1 to 8 and the type of banana grapes. When the operation is stopped, the grape or banana grape is awarded and transferred to an unfavorable gaming state. When the stop operation is performed with an operation procedure that cannot be pulled in, the grapes and banana grapes cannot be taken out and 9 medals can be paid out, but the special outcome is derived and controlled in a state advantageous to the player. There may be. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game won for grapes 1-8 and banana grapes, the winner is the one who stopped the operation with a procedure that cannot pull in the types of grapes 1-8 and banana grapes that were won. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in that it is controlled by RT2 in the game after the game than when the operation is stopped by the operation procedure capable of drawing the types of grapes 1 to 8 and banana grapes.

  -In relation to the third embodiment, for example, the above-mentioned promotion replay is a one-piece small combination with one payout, and a fall replay is a specific small combination with more than one piece medal payout. Yes, if a single small combination and a specific small combination are won simultaneously in the same way as in the third embodiment described above, and a specific small combination winning can be avoided by an operation procedure according to the combination of simultaneous winnings, it is specified during RT When a small combination is won, a specific small combination is selected when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of simultaneous winning (first advantageous operation procedure, second advantageous operation procedure, see FIG. 28). When the winning is generated and the RT is finished, and the operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure, the winning of one small combination may be generated and the RT may be maintained. Thus, apart from the degree of advantage in the game won for a specific small role during RT, the procedure when avoiding the specific small role winning is different from the procedure for avoiding the specific small role winning. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in that the RT is maintained without ending in the game after the game than when the game is operated.

  (9) In the first embodiment described above, an example is described in which the RT1 is controlled from the preparation mode to the RT1 and then controlled to the RT2 by winning the promotion replay in the RT1. (For example, promotion replay winning) is controlled to RT2 after being established, and then it is controlled to RT1 by deriving a special outcome at RT2, so that RT1 is not directly controlled from the preparation mode. It may be configured (for example, in the preparation mode, an internal lottery is performed so that grapes are always won simultaneously with the promotion replay).

  (10) In the first embodiment described above, an example where the presentation state determined when controlled by RT1 is controlled to any one of the CZ mode, the DZ mode, and the normal mode other than the AT mode. explained. However, when controlled to RT1, it may be configured to always control to CZ mode. Even in this case, since the execution ratio at which the partial navigation effect is executed is selected from a plurality of types, a predetermined number of games are consumed and the AT mode is entered without causing a fall replay winning after being controlled by RT1. It can change the sense of expectation of being controlled.

  (11) In the DZ mode according to the first embodiment described above, only the fact that one of the specific winning situations is present is notified except that the midway navigation effect is executed according to the midway navigation execution rate. The example of the production state has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the DZ mode, as in the CZ mode, it is determined whether or not to execute the navigation effect according to a predetermined execution ratio when a specific winning situation is reached and is determined to be executed. It is good also as a production | presentation state which alert | reports only that it will be in one of the specific winning situations, when a part navigation effect is performed when it determines that it will not perform. In this case, the CZ mode and the DZ mode may be configured to have different probabilities that an execution ratio having a high degree of advantage for the player is selected. For example, an execution ratio with a higher degree of advantage for the player may be selected with a higher probability in the CZ mode than in the DZ mode.

  (12) In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, when a bonus is won, the RT performance state after the bonus ends is drawn at a rate corresponding to the winning status at the time of winning the bonus. An example was described. However, the RT effect state after the bonus ends may be drawn in a proportion corresponding to the effect state and game state at the time of winning the bonus as well as the winning situation at the time of winning the bonus. For example, the AT mode may be determined at a higher rate when the effect state when winning the bonus is the AT mode than when the bonus mode is not the AT mode. Alternatively, the AT mode may be determined at a higher rate when the gaming state at the time of winning the bonus is RT than when it is not RT. In such a configuration, as the player is in an advantageous state or a game state that is advantageous to the player, the proportion of the effect state that is highly advantageous to the player after the bonus ends is higher, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved. When the effect state at the time of winning the bonus is the AT mode, the AT mode may be controlled even after the bonus ends.

  (13) In the above-described first embodiment, an example has been described in which the 100% complete navigation effect is executed when a specific winning situation is reached when the AT mode is set. However, the execution ratio for executing the complete navigation effect in the AT mode is not limited to 100%, and is higher than the CZ mode, for example, and has a higher degree of advantage for the player than other effect states such as the CZ mode. I just need it.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the example of controlling to RB1 when BB1 to BB3 and controlling to RB2 when BB4 or 5 has been described, but the same RB is used regardless of the type of BB. You may comprise so that it may control. For example, you may comprise so that it may control to RB1 irrespective of the kind of BB. In this case, when controlled to BB, the bonus is such that a point can be always granted, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  (15) In the above-described first embodiment, even when not in the AT mode, the game is controlled to the AT mode by digesting a predetermined number of games without falling down and replaying at RT, and 10 is exemplified as the predetermined number of games. did. However, the predetermined number of games is not limited to 10 and may be any number of games. In addition, the predetermined number of games is not limited to a certain number, and for example, a lottery is selected from a plurality of types of games (for example, 3, 10, 15, etc.) according to different ratios depending on the performance state being controlled. It may be. In addition, as the predetermined number of games, for example, a lottery may be drawn from a plurality of types of games (for example, 3, 10, 15, etc.) according to different ratios depending on the given points. Thereby, since a predetermined number of games until the AT mode is controlled change, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (16) In the first embodiment described above, the example is described in which the AT mode is determined in the production state lottery or the game is controlled to the AT mode by using a predetermined number of games without winning a fall replay. However, the AT mode may be controlled also when a special condition is satisfied. The special conditions are satisfied, for example, when the bonus is won again until the specific number of games (for example, 3 games) is consumed after the bonus ends, or the upper limit number of games is consumed without being controlled by the AT mode. There may be. Thereby, since it is controlled to AT mode as a privilege when special conditions are satisfied, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (17) Each lottery such as the performance state lottery in the first embodiment described above has been described with respect to an example in which each lottery is lottery according to the winning rate corresponding to the total number of granted points as shown in FIGS. . However, the various types of lottery are not limited to the total number of granted points, and may be configured to be selected according to a winning rate according to, for example, a set value that is set, an effect state at the time of the lottery, a game state at the time of the lottery, and the like. Good.

  (18) In the first embodiment described above, an example in which the operation procedure is narrowed down to two options by notifying the procedure other than the avoidance procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning as a partial navigation effect has been described. . However, the partial navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, when not only the first stop reel but also the second stop reel is involved in the avoidance procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning, the first Only the stop reel may be notified, and the choices for the second stop may be two choices. Moreover, when the push order and the stop timing are involved in the avoidance procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning, only one of them (for example, only the push order) may be notified.

  (19) In the first embodiment described above, in the notice lottery in S4 and S6 of FIG. 13, the degree of advantage for the player is lower than the given points set in S2, that is, points below the given points are notice points. The example determined as is described. However, if the notification points determined in the notification lottery in S4 and S6 in FIG. 13 are determined from points whose total number of notification points is not equal to or greater than the total number of granted points even after notification, S2 The player may be configured such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than the grant points set in step 1, that is, points more than the grant points are determined as notification points.

  FIG. 34 is an example of a table used in the notification lottery, and is a diagram for explaining a table in which more points than the given points can be determined as notification points in the difference number corresponding notification lottery.

  Also in the difference number corresponding notification lottery in this modification, the lot number determination whether or not to notify the point according to the difference number is performed with reference to the difference number correspondence table A of FIG. The difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 34A is the same as the table in FIG.

  When it is decided to notify with reference to the difference correspondence table A in FIG. 34 (a), the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference correspondence table B in FIG. 34 (b). In accordance with the difference number, a lottery for determining the notification points is performed.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “0 to 1”, the total number of reporting points after reporting the current reporting point at a rate of 100% is given as the reporting point. It is determined that the post-notification difference number is “0”, which is the difference from the total number of granted points to which the given points are added. Specifically, the notification points are (difference number−difference number after notification + giving points). In this case, if the difference number is “1”, the notification point is determined as (1−0 + 1) = point “2”. In this way, more points than the given points are notified.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “2-3”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “0” at a rate of 15%, and “1” at a rate of 25%. ”And“ 2 ”at a rate of 60%.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “4”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10% and is set to “2” at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be “3” at a rate of 30% and “4” at a rate of 40%.

  Hereinafter, similarly, the post-notification difference number is determined according to the distribution rate specified from the granted point and the difference number, and the notification point is determined by calculating (difference number−post-report difference number + grant point). The

  For example, when the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3” and “1” is determined as the difference number after notification, (3-1 + 3) = point “5” is determined as the notification point. To be determined.

  As described above, when a lottery is performed using a table in which more points than the granted points can be determined as notification points, for example, even when the difference number becomes too large, the player is more likely than the granted points. By reporting a point with a high degree of advantage as a reporting point, the difference number can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to easily improve the reliability of the total number of notification points.

  (20) In the industry where the slot machines in the above-described embodiments are distributed, inspection (type test) by a third party is obligated at the pre-shipment stage, and the predetermined standard is satisfied in the type test. There is a special situation that only the determined model is allowed to be shipped to the game hall. Further, in recent years, in order to prevent the shooting ability from being increased too much, it is required to be able to perform a test assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by a player. Yes.

  Therefore, in the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, in consideration of such special circumstances and needs, a test is performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. “Output means” for outputting “information that can be performed” may be further provided. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 35, the game control board, the effect control board, and the input / output board will be described as an example of “output means”, and the recommended operation procedure information will be referred to as “the slot machine is shipped to the market and the player actually As an example of “information that can be tested on the assumption that a game is played”. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine equipped with a test apparatus 1200 for performing a type test and an input / output board 1100 for inputting / outputting test information used for the test.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes winning status information for specifying the game start and winning status, and the rotational positions of the reel motors 32L to 32R (for example, Recommendations that are expected to be actually operated by the player in consideration of the rotational position information for specifying the step number of the predetermined position, the area number of the symbol located in the lower stage, etc., the presence or absence of navigation effects, etc. The recommended operation procedure information for specifying the operation procedure is included. Note that the test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes winning information for specifying that a winning has occurred and the type of the winning, payout information for specifying that a medal has been paid out, and the like. , Other information included.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, the test information input from the test apparatus 1200 to the slot machine 1 includes game start information for starting a game such as setting a bet amount and reel rotation to start a game, and reels. The game end information for ending the game such as stopping the game is included.

  The input / output board 1100 mounted on the slot machine 1 includes a connector 1101 for electrically connecting to the game control board 40, a connector 1102 for electrically connecting to the effect control board 90, and a test apparatus 1200. A connector 1103 for electrical connection is provided. The type test described above is performed by inputting / outputting various types of information in a state where the input / output board 100 and the test apparatus 1200 are connected by a connector. Hereinafter, the flow and operation of various information when the type test is performed will be specifically described.

  First, the test apparatus 1200 outputs game start information in order to start a game in the slot machine 1. The game start information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, the process for starting a game (the bet number setting, the lottery process, the reel rotation process, etc. in the BET process) is performed.

  And the main control part 41 of the game control board 40 produces | generates and outputs winning condition information at the time of a game start. The corresponding selection status information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can specify that the game has started and the winning situation.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 generates and outputs rotational position information according to the reel rotation. The rotational position information is information for specifying a step existing at a predetermined position among 168 steps of each of the reel motors 32L to 32R, for example, and is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the current rotation position can be specified for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 generates and outputs recommended operation procedure information according to the winning situation or the like. The recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the recommended operation procedure can be specified.

  Based on the current rotation position of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information, the test apparatus 1200 provides game end information for stopping each of the reels 2L to 2R in the recommended operation procedure specified from the recommended operation procedure information. Generate and output. The game end information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped according to the game end information, and a process (reel rotation process, winning determination process, payout process, etc.) for ending the game is performed. Do. Thereby, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  As described above, information is repeatedly input / output between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100, and the game can be automatically repeated. As a result, the type test for the slot machine 1 can be automatically performed.

  As described above, the recommended operation procedure may be information for enabling the test to be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. For example, the recommended operation procedure is an operation procedure for deriving a symbol combination to be actually stopped by a player by a game effect (for example, a navigation effect or the like) for notifying information related to the winning situation. When the game effect for notifying the information related to is not performed, a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing the small part missing, so-called DDT hitting method, KKK hitting method, etc.) may be used.

  Specifically, the recommended operation procedure is, for example, a normal replay in which a symbol combination to be actually stopped when a navigation effect at the time of falling replay is executed is simultaneously selected, so that the normal replay is derived. The operation procedure for Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, when the current rotation position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information becomes the position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the recommended operation procedure information, the corresponding reel The game end information for stopping the game is output. As a result, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure, and the normal replay winning selected in the slot machine 1 can be generated.

  As a result, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, the recommended operation procedure for deriving the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by the game effect informing the information related to the winning situation is specified. can do. As a result, the type test can be performed based on the results of operation according to the recommended operating procedure, so the test should be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. Can do.

  In addition, the recommended operation procedure when the game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (in the case of including a predetermined small role that is missed by the operation procedure) It is also possible to use a procedure for minimizing missing, so-called DDT method, KKK method, etc. For example, it is conceivable that a player who has not recognized whether or not a bonus has been won usually performs a stop operation so that a predetermined small role can be won as much as possible. This is because it is possible to minimize the possibility of losing the selected small part that has been won. That is, the stop operation is performed so that the predetermined small role can be won, so that, for example, when the predetermined small role is won, it is more reliable when the predetermined small role is won. Can win a prize, and if you have not won a given small role and have won another small role (for example, a small role that has not been missed), you can pull in the selected small role, This is because the possibility of being missed can be minimized. Accordingly, for example, compared with an operation procedure in which a predetermined small role cannot be won, the possibility of losing a small role is reduced by performing a stop operation in an operation procedure for winning a predetermined small role. it can.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed may be an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting). This is because when the game effect is not performed, it is considered that the player can proceed with the game without pressing in consideration of speeding up the game. The recommended operation procedure information in this case is information that can specify the region numbers 1 to 21 for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Thereby, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, even when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed, the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player The recommended operation procedure for deriving can be identified. As a result, since the type test can be performed based on the result of operation according to the recommended operation procedure, it is not during the so-called AT assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. You can also test for time.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure information that is output when a game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing a small part missing, so-called DDT batting method, KKK batting For example, the first information for specifying a method and the like and the second information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) may be output. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can perform a test when a game effect that informs information related to the winning situation is not performed using the first information or the second information as necessary. It is possible to perform a test when a game effect for notifying information related to the winning situation is not performed in a state closer to the case where the game is played by the player.

  The sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, a first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and outputs data for specifying the region number for the left reel 2L, The second strobe signal is output, data for specifying the region number for the middle reel 2C is output, and further, the third strobe signal is output, and the data for specifying the region number for the right reel 2R. To complete the output of the recommended operating procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, the position where each reel should be stopped can be specified from the recommended operation procedure information, and the game end information is output in consideration of the rotation position specified from the rotation position information. Each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  When the recommended operation procedure includes the reel stop order, the sub control unit 91 outputs the first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example. Data for specifying an area number for the first reel to be stopped is output, a second strobe signal is output, data for specifying an area number for the second reel to be stopped is output, and 3 is output, and data for specifying the region number for the third reel to be stopped is output, thereby completing the output of the recommended operation procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, in addition to the recommended operation procedure information, the reel stop order can be specified in addition to the position where each reel should be stopped, and the rotational position specified from the rotational position information is taken into consideration. The game end information can be output and each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  Note that after the type test is completed, it is conceivable that an illegal act of inputting illegal information via the connector 1103 described above is performed. In order to avoid this, for example, the connector 1103 may be provided so as to be removable from the input / output board 1100, and the connector 1103 may be configured to be removable at the shipping stage. In the shipping stage, the input / output board 1100 may be shipped without being mounted. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as inputting unauthorized information.

  (21) In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the first embodiment described above, an example in which lottery is performed according to the total number of granted points updated in S10 of FIG. 13 has been described. However, the total number corresponding notification lottery may be configured to perform the lottery according to the total number of notification points updated in S9 of FIG. In the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, the tables shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the granted point accurately are notified so far. The probability is determined according to the total number of points. Further, in the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, it is determined to notify at a high rate when the total number of notification points is smaller than when the total number of notification points is large, and at a high rate, depending on the grant points or the grant points The notification point is determined so as to notify that a close point has been given. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of notification points, the higher the degree of attention the player has on whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (22) In the point-related processing in the first embodiment described above, even if the total number of granted points updated in S10 is the upper limit, if the total number of notification points updated in S9 is not the upper limit, S3 You may comprise so that subsequent processes may be performed. Thereby, even after the total number of granted points has reached the upper limit, when the total number of notification points has not reached the upper limit, the same control as before the total number of given points has reached the upper limit is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the point giving effect is not executed after the total number of given points reaches the upper limit. Note that when the total number of notification points reaches the upper limit, the point-related processing may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

  (23) The example in which the fall replay that is the re-gamer is set as the winning combination that triggers the termination of RT1 in the above-described embodiment has been described. However, the winning combination that triggers the termination of RT1 is not limited to the re-playing combination, but may be a predetermined small combination, a single bonus that controls the next game as a bonus by winning.

  (24) A process of clearing (for example, “0”) the number of navigation stock when the bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stock remains may be performed. May be performed, a process of subtracting a predetermined number may be performed, a process of adding and adding a predetermined number may be performed, and which process is to be performed every time the bonus is won It may be determined and the determined processing is performed. Thereby, the variation when a bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stocks remains is increased, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (25) In the above-described first embodiment, the example in which the number of awarded points is not subtracted has been described. However, given the predetermined subtraction condition (for example, winning a specific winning combination), a predetermined number of given points is determined. You may comprise so that a number may be subtracted. In this case, the number of points actually subtracted may be notified as the number of subtracted points, or the number of points larger than the number of points actually subtracted may be notified. As for whether to notify the number of points actually subtracted or the number of points greater than the number of points actually subtracted, at least one of grant points, difference numbers, grant points, report points Accordingly, it may be configured to determine with different probabilities. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the point being subtracted even after the point is awarded, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value accompanying winning a prize has been described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. It may be a slot machine or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (27) In the first embodiment described above, even when the effect state during RT is controlled from the state other than the AT mode to the AT mode, the end condition (the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of navigation stocks = 0, The example in which the AT mode is ended and the DZ mode is controlled when the continuation failure or the like is established has been described. In other words, even when the navigation effect is controlled from the effect state where the navigation effect is not performed or the navigation effect is performed with a low probability to the effect state where the navigation effect is performed with a high probability, the navigation effect is performed again with a low probability. The example that can be controlled to the effect state has been described. However, if the navigation state is not performed or the navigation state is performed with a low probability, and the control state is controlled with a high probability that the navigation effect is performed, for example, a bonus winning or winning or a fall replay winning is performed. Until then, the control to the effect state where the navigation effect is performed with high probability may be continued. Even in this case, when the performance state during RT is other than AT mode, the degree to which a predetermined number of games can be digested is changed without winning a fall replay depending on whether the RT is RT1 or RT2. In addition, it is possible to improve the expectation that the production state during RT is controlled to the AT mode.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the RT1 is controlled to RT2 by the promotion replay winning and the RT2 is controlled to RT1 by the special outcome derivation has been described. However, if RT1 is controlled to RT2 by promotion replay winning, it may not be controlled directly from RT2 to RT1 (hereinafter also referred to as a one-way system from RT1 to RT2). Thereby, the expectation with respect to being controlled from RT1 to RT2 can be improved.

  (28) When the configuration of the one-way system from RT1 to RT2 shown in (27) is adopted, control is performed from RT1 to RT2 during the AT mode, and even after the AT mode ends, control is performed directly from RT2 to RT1. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for maintaining RT without winning the fall replay.

  In the above-described embodiment, the presentation state during RT is controlled from the normal mode, the DZ mode, and the CZ mode to the AT mode, and is controlled from the AT mode to a mode other than the AT mode such as the DZ mode. explained. However, in order to improve the degree to which RT is maintained even after the AT mode ends during RT, the configuration in which the mode is controlled from the mode other than the AT mode to the AT mode is not an essential configuration. Only a configuration controlled to a mode other than the mode may be provided.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, RT1 and RT2 are exemplified as RTs that fall into the normal gaming state due to a fall replay winning. However, the RT that falls to the normal state by the fall replay winning may be only one type of RT, for example, RT1. Even in this case, for example, when the CZ mode is controlled during RT1, even before 10 games are consumed, 10 games are consumed without winning a fall replay according to the execution ratio of some navigation effects. Since the degree to which it is possible can be changed, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the navigation state is not performed or the navigation state is performed with a low probability, and the control state is controlled with a high probability that the navigation effect is performed, for example, a bonus winning or winning or a fall replay winning is performed. Until then, the control to the effect state where the navigation effect is performed with high probability may be continued. Even in this case, when the performance state during RT is the CZ mode, the degree to which a predetermined number of games can be digested without winning a fall replay can be changed according to the execution ratio, and the performance during RT The expectation that the state is controlled to the AT mode can be improved.

  In addition, although the example of controlling to the DZ mode when the AT mode ends during RT has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control may be performed to the CZ mode in which a partial navigation effect is executed. As a result, after the AT mode ends during RT, the CZ mode is controlled, so that the degree of maintenance of RT can be changed according to the execution ratio of some navigation effects, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

  (30) In the above-described first embodiment, examples in which the grant points are used for various lotteries have been described. However, the grant points may be used for executing the navigation effect regardless of the effect state. For example, even if the presentation state is not determined in the AT mode and the presentation state during RT is a mode other than the AT mode, a complete navigation effect may be executed according to the given points. Good. Further, even when it is determined and controlled in a mode other than the AT mode or the CZ mode in the rendering state lottery, a partial navigation rendering may be executed according to the granted points. In this case, it may further be configured to determine whether to execute a complete navigation effect or a partial navigation effect according to the granted points. Thereby, the value of a point increases and the expectation with respect to giving a point can be improved.

  It should be noted that the navigation effect may be executed as many times as the number of points (the navigation effect is executed once for point 1), and when a fall replay or the like is won while the number of games corresponding to the points is consumed. A navigation effect may be executed (a navigation effect can be executed over 3 games for point 1), and a navigation effect is executed each time a fall replay is won according to a proportion corresponding to the amount of points granted. A lottery for determining whether or not to perform a navigation effect may be executed when winning (the greater the total number of granted points, the higher the probability that is used for the navigation effect lottery is determined at a higher rate).

  (31) The number of determination values corresponding to the fall replay may be different for each set value so that the fall replay winning probability varies depending on the set value. In this case, for example, the higher the set value, the lower the replay winning probability may be set. Further, the number of determination values corresponding to the promotion replay may be varied for each set value so that the promotion replay winning probability varies depending on the set value. In this case, for example, the higher the set value, the higher the replay winning probability may be set. As a result, in the production state other than the AT mode during RT, the degree to which 10 games can be consumed without winning the fall replay and the degree to which the promotion replay is awarded and transferred to RT2 according to the set value set. Since it can be changed, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (32) In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 8, the example in which the fall replay avoidance procedure is the pressing order of the stop operation has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Fall replay 1 (white 7-banana-banana), fall replay 2 (black 7-banana-banana), and fall replay 3 (BAR-banana-banana) are provided. In the case where each of the fall replays 1 to 3 can be won at the same time, a stop operation is performed at a timing so as not to stop the left symbol constituting the fall replay that is won simultaneously on the winning line. The procedure is a procedure for avoiding the fall replay. Further, the fall replay avoidance procedure is not limited to the push order only or the stop operation timing, but may be the push order + stop operation timing.

  (33) In the first embodiment described above, the example in which the game is controlled to the AT mode by using 10 games as a predetermined period in a mode other than the AT mode during RT has been described. However, the predetermined period is not limited to the period for which the game is consumed for a predetermined number of times, but the period for digesting the game for the number of times determined by random lottery using a random number or the like from a plurality of types of times, and winning the fall replay The period until the number of times that can be avoided without winning a prize reaches a predetermined number, the period until the number of times that a specific winning combination (such as strawberry 1) is won without reaching a predetermined number of falling replays It may be.

  (34) In the above-described first embodiment, the example of winning the fall replay at a predetermined winning rate even when controlled by RT2 has been described. However, the number of determination values may be set so as not to win the fall replay when controlled by RT2. Further, when controlled to RT2, even if a fall replay is won, RT may be continued without being controlled to the normal gaming state. Thereby, the expectation with respect to being controlled by RT2 can be improved. Further, even when the AT mode is ended while being controlled by RT2, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the AT mode will be controlled again after a predetermined period.

  (35) In the first embodiment described above, an example of falling from RT2 to RT1 by deriving a special outcome that is a missed outcome at the time of winning a grape has been described. However, falling from RT2 to RT1 has been described. The opportunity is not limited to this. For example, a prize may be awarded to a specific small role (for example, melon), or a promotion replay or a normal replay prize may be generated when a fall replay prize is avoided when winning a fall replay. This makes it possible to add the fun of being controlled by RT1 instead of avoiding a specific small role winning or falling replay.

  (36) In the first embodiment described above, the example of promotion from RT1 to RT2 by winning a promotion replay has been described, but the promotion opportunity from RT1 to RT2 is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined combination of symbols that is generated only when the strawberry 1 + strawberry 2 is avoided and the strawberry winning is avoided may be derived. This makes it possible to add the fun of being controlled by RT2 instead of missing strawberry.

  (37) In the first embodiment described above, the example in which the AT mode for one navigation stock is terminated by using 50 games as a specific period in the AT mode during RT has been described. However, the specific period is not limited to a period of game digestion for a predetermined number of times, but a period of game digestion for a number of times determined by random lottery using a random number or the like from a plurality of types of times, won for fall replay Then, a period until the number of times that the complete navigation effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a period until the number of times that a specific winning combination (for example, strawberry 1 or the like) is won reaches a predetermined number, or the like may be used.

  (38) In the first embodiment described above, examples of combinations including a promotion replay and a fall replay, and combinations including a normal replay and a fall replay are given as combinations in which a plurality of types of replays are won simultaneously. However, the combination in which a plurality of types of replays are won simultaneously is not limited to this, and may include a combination in which a promotion replay, a normal replay, and a fall replay are simultaneously won.

  For example, in RT, as a combination in which a plurality of types of replays are won simultaneously, a first combination of promotion replay + normal replay + falling replay, and a second combination of promotion replay + normal replay + falling replay + control replay 1; The third combination of promotion replay + normal replay + falling replay + control replay 2 may be set.

  In this case, for example, when the first combination is won and the reel that is stopped first is promoted replay when it is left, normal replay when it is inside, and falling replay when it is right Reel control is performed, and when the second combination is won and the first stopped reel is left, a normal replay is awarded, a fall replay is awarded when it is in the middle, and a promotion replay is awarded when it is right In this way, the reel control is performed, and when the third combination is won and the first stopped reel is a fall replay when it is left, a promotion replay when it is inside, and a normal replay when it is right The reel control may be performed so as to be performed. Thereby, in RT1, depending on which of the first to third combinations is won, the fall replay avoidance procedure can be made different and the promoted replay winning procedure can be made different.

  (39-1) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a halfway navigation effect is executed according to a predetermined ratio during any RT of the CZ mode, the DZ mode, and the normal mode in which the complete navigation effect is not executed has been described. However, the gaming state and the performance state in which the midway navigation effect is executed are not limited to this. For example, unless there is a mistake in the operation, an effect state (semi-standard) that is determined to be controlled in the AT mode internally. It may be configured such that it is executed only in the AT mode) and not executed in a state other than the quasi-AT mode.

  For example, even if it is determined that “continuation success” is determined in the continuous lottery shown in FIG. 23, the slot is configured to be controlled in the quasi-AT mode as a previous stage until the control is performed in the AT mode until a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the machine, in the quasi-AT mode, a midway navigation effect or a complete navigation effect may be executed as follows. In the first embodiment, in the quasi-AT mode, when a fall replay is won, a predetermined condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode, and a full navigation effect is executed. By executing a navigation effect on the way, a predetermined condition may be established and the AT mode may be promoted. In the third embodiment, in the quasi-AT mode, when a promotion replay such as a left push replay and a fall replay are won at the same time, a predetermined condition is established to promote to the AT mode by executing a halfway navigation effect. It may be.

  In addition, the AT mode is controlled until the fall replay is won by the number of times corresponding to the number of acquired navigation stocks, and the predetermined start even when the number of fall replay wins has not yet reached the number corresponding to the number of navigation stocks In a slot machine configured to be controlled in the quasi-AT mode as a step before controlling to the AT mode until the predetermined end condition is satisfied after the condition is satisfied, in the quasi-AT mode, the halfway navigation effect or complete as follows A navigation effect may be executed. In the first embodiment, in the quasi-AT mode, when a fall replay is won, a predetermined end condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode, and a full navigation effect is executed. Sometimes, a predetermined end condition may be established by executing a midway navigation effect to promote the AT mode. Further, in the third embodiment, in the quasi-AT mode, when promotion replay such as left-press replay and fall replay are won at the same time, a predetermined end condition is established and promoted to AT mode by executing a midway navigation effect. You may do it.

  In other words, it may be configured to perform control in the AT mode after allowing the player to recognize that it is in the quasi-AT mode by executing a navigation effect that can only be performed in the quasi-AT mode. In such a quasi-AT mode, the same effect as when the AT mode is not continued, that is, the same effect as when in the DZ mode is executed. According to such a configuration, after the player realizes that the AT mode has ended by executing the same effect as in the DZ mode, the navigation effect is executed halfway when being controlled in the quasi-AT mode. Alternatively, the pleasure of continuing the AT mode can be given by executing the complete navigation effect.

  (39-2) The game state and the effect state in which the navigation effect is executed on the way are, for example, the DZ mode controlled when the quasi-AT mode shown in (39-1) and when the AT mode ends. It may be configured to execute only at certain times.

  For example, even if it is determined that “continuation success” is determined in the continuous lottery shown in FIG. 23, the slot is configured to be controlled in the quasi-AT mode as a previous stage until the control is performed in the AT mode until a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the machine, the navigation effect may be executed in the quasi-AT mode and the DZ mode as follows. In the first embodiment, when a fall replay is won in the quasi-AT mode, a predetermined condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode and a complete navigation effect is executed. In the quasi-AT mode, grapes such as left-pressed grapes and banana grapes are simultaneously When winning, a navigation effect is executed on the way. When the number of times the navigation effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a predetermined condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode. Even in the DZ mode, grapes such as left-pressed grapes And banana grapes may be won at the same time, a midway navigation effect may be executed according to a predetermined ratio. Further, in the third embodiment, in the quasi-AT mode, when the promotion replay such as the left press replay and the fall replay are won at the same time, the midway navigation effect is executed, and the number of times the midway navigation effect is executed is a predetermined number of times. As a result, the predetermined condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode. When the promotion replay such as the left press replay and the fall replay are won at the same time even in the DZ mode, the navigation effect is executed in accordance with the predetermined ratio. Also good.

  In addition, the AT mode is controlled until the fall replay is won by the number of times corresponding to the number of acquired navigation stocks, and the predetermined start even when the number of fall replay wins has not yet reached the number corresponding to the number of navigation stocks In the slot machine configured to be controlled in the quasi-AT mode as a pre-stage for controlling to the AT mode after the condition is satisfied until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the navigation effect is as follows in the quasi-AT mode and the DZ mode. May be executed. In the first embodiment, in the quasi-AT mode, when a fall replay is won, a predetermined end condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode, and a full navigation effect is executed. Sometimes, a midway navigation effect is executed, and when the number of times that the midway navigation effect is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, a predetermined end condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode. And banana grapes may be won at the same time, a midway navigation effect may be executed according to a predetermined ratio. Further, in the third embodiment, in the quasi-AT mode, when the promotion replay such as the left press replay and the fall replay are won at the same time, the midway navigation effect is executed, and the number of times the midway navigation effect is executed is a predetermined number of times. As a result, the predetermined end condition is established and the mode is promoted to the AT mode. When the promotion replay such as the left push replay and the fall replay are won at the same time even in the DZ mode, the navigation effect is executed in accordance with a predetermined ratio. May be.

  In such a quasi-AT mode, the same effect as when the AT mode is not continued, that is, the same effect as when in the DZ mode is executed. According to such a configuration, after the player realizes that the AT mode is ended by executing the same effect as the DZ mode, the complete navigation effect is executed or the midway navigation effect is executed a predetermined number of times. By this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the AT mode has continued or is highly likely internally, and can give pleasure to the continued AT mode.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a halfway navigation effect is executed only when a complete navigation effect is not executed has been described. Even if there is a mistake in the operation of the first stop, a midway navigation effect may be executed according to a predetermined probability (100%, 50%, etc.). Thereby, the advantageous degree in AT mode in which complete navigation effects are executed can be further improved.

  (41) In the first embodiment described above, an example in which the operation procedure is narrowed down to two options by notifying the procedure other than the avoidance procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning as a partial navigation effect has been described. . However, the partial navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, when the avoidance procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning is constituted by, for example, a procedure for stopping first and a procedure for stopping second. May notify either one of the procedure for the first stop and the procedure for the second stop, that is, a part of the avoidance procedure. Even when configured in this manner, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (42) In the above-described embodiment, when the specific winning situation is set and the first stop operation is not performed in the first advantageous operation procedure, regardless of the operation procedure in the first stop, The example in which the advantageous display result is derived when operated in the second advantageous operation procedure in the second stop and / or the third stop after the first stop has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a specific winning situation is established, after the first stop, after being operated in the special operation procedure without being operated in the first advantageous operation procedure, the first stop and thereafter. When the second advantageous operation procedure is operated in the second stop and / or the third stop, the advantageous display result is derived, and the first advantageous operation procedure and the special operation procedure are operated in the first stop. Later, the reel control may be performed so that the advantageous display result is not derived even if the second advantageous operation procedure is operated in the second stop or / and the third stop after the first stop. Good. Thereby, the importance of the operation procedure in a 1st stop can be improved, and the interest at the time of a 1st stop can be improved.

  (43) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (6)

By setting the number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived to a variable display device having a plurality of variable display areas in which the display state can be changed. A slot machine that is finished and can receive a prize according to the display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means for accepting an operation for stopping the display state in the variable display area for each of the plurality of variable display areas;
A means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the pre-decision means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, the display state in all of the plurality of variable display areas When the derivation operation accepting unit accepts an operation, the derivation is performed so that the display state in the variable display area corresponding to the operation is stopped and the display state in the variable display area is updated. Control means;
An informing means for informing predetermined information,
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the pre-decision means is one of a plurality of types of identification results, and the identification among the plurality of variable display areas in a predetermined first stage. When an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a specific procedure for stopping the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the result type, regardless of the operation procedure accepted in the subsequent stage, the player Even when the operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting means in a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage, the control for deriving an advantageous advantageous display result is performed. When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a special procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result in the second stage determined, the advantageous display result is displayed. Performs control to derive a,
The notification means includes
First notification means for notifying specific procedure information capable of specifying a specific procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, on condition that the determination result of the prior determination unit is any of the plurality of types of specific results; ,
The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation operation accepting unit is different from the specific procedure in the first stage. And a second notification means for notifying special procedure information capable of specifying a special procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Characteristic slot machine. By setting the number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived to a variable display device having a plurality of variable display areas in which the display state can be changed. A slot machine that is finished and can receive a prize according to the display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means for accepting an operation for stopping the display state in the variable display area for each of the plurality of variable display areas;
A means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the pre-decision means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, the display state in all of the plurality of variable display areas When the derivation operation accepting unit accepts an operation, the derivation is performed so that the display state in the variable display area corresponding to the operation is stopped and the display state in the variable display area is updated. Control means;
An informing means for informing predetermined information,
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results, and in the first predetermined stage, the derivation control means When an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a specific procedure for stopping the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the type of the specific result at a timing corresponding to the type of the specific result, it is accepted in a subsequent stage. Regardless of the operation procedure performed, control is performed to derive an advantageous display result advantageous to the player, and the display state of the variable display area corresponding to the type of the specific result in the first stage is changed to the type of the specific result. Even when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the procedure of stopping at a timing different from the corresponding timing, the first stage When an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a special procedure for stopping the display state of the predetermined variable display area at a timing corresponding to the type of the specific result in a second predetermined stage later. , Control to derive the advantageous display result,
The notification means includes
First notification means for notifying specific procedure information capable of specifying a specific procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, on condition that the determination result of the prior determination unit is any of the plurality of types of specific results; ,
The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation operation accepting unit is different from the specific procedure in the first stage. And a second notification means for notifying special procedure information capable of specifying a special procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Characteristic slot machine.   The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation operation accepting unit is different from the specific procedure in the first stage. When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the operation is accepted, the special effect executing means for executing a predetermined special effect before the special procedure information is notified by the second notification means. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising:   The specific procedure information is not notified when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results, and the derivation operation accepting unit is different from the specific procedure in the first stage. A delay that delays the timing at which the acceptance of the operation is started in the second stage by the derivation operation accepting means until the predetermined period has elapsed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising means. In an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the advantageous state is not terminated when the advantageous display result is derived, and the advantageous state is terminated when an end display result different from the advantageous display result is derived. With means,
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is any one of the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation control unit performs a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage by the derivation operation reception unit. The control for deriving the end display result when an operation is accepted and an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the special procedure in the second stage is performed. The slot machine described in Crab. Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state advantageous to the player when the advantageous display result is derived in a predetermined gaming state;
Normal state control means for controlling to a normal state that is not controlled in the advantageous state even when the advantageous display result is derived when an end display result different from the advantageous display result is derived in the predetermined gaming state; With
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is any one of the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation control unit performs a procedure different from the specific procedure in the first stage by the derivation operation reception unit. The control for deriving the end display result when an operation is accepted and an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the special procedure in the second stage is performed. The slot machine described in Crab.

Images